The Excellency of the pen and pencil exemplifying the uses of them in the most exquisite and mysterious arts of drawing, etching, engraving, limning, painting in oyl, washing of maps & pictures, also the way to cleanse any old painting, and preserve the colours : collected from the writings of the ablest masters both ancient and modern, as Albert Durer, P. Lomantius, and divers others ; furnished with divers cuts in copper, being copied from the best masters ...
      
       
         
           1668
        
      
       Approx. 168 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 74 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2007-10 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A39003
         Wing E3779
         ESTC R22483
         12363792
         ocm 12363792
         60341
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A39003)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 60341)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1641-1700 ; 914:25)
      
       
         
           
             The Excellency of the pen and pencil exemplifying the uses of them in the most exquisite and mysterious arts of drawing, etching, engraving, limning, painting in oyl, washing of maps & pictures, also the way to cleanse any old painting, and preserve the colours : collected from the writings of the ablest masters both ancient and modern, as Albert Durer, P. Lomantius, and divers others ; furnished with divers cuts in copper, being copied from the best masters ...
             Dürer, Albrecht, 1471-1528.
          
           [16], 121 p. : ill.
           
             Printed by Thomas Ratcliff and Thomas Daniel, for Dorman Newman and Richard Jones ...,
             London :
             1668.
          
           
             Reproduction of original in Huntington Library.
             Table of contents: p. [7]-[13]
             Advertisement: p. [14]-[16]
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Drawing -- Study and teaching.
           Drawing -- Early works to 1800.
           Art -- Technique.
        
      
    
     
        2006-10 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2006-10 Aptara
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2006-12 Celeste Ng
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2006-12 Celeste Ng
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2007-02 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
           
             
               The
               Excellency
               of
               The
               PEN
               and
               PENCIL
               .
            
             
               London
               Printed
               for
               Rich
               :
               Jones
               &
               Dorman
               Newman
               and
               are
               to
               be
               sold
               at
               their
               shops
               at
               the
               Golden
               Lyon
               and
               Chyrurgions
               Armes
               in
               Little
               Brittaine
               .
            
          
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           EXCELLENCY
           OF
           THE
           PEN
           and
           PENCIL
           ,
           EXEMPLIFYING
           The
           Uses
           of
           them
           in
           the
           most
           Exquisite
           and
           Mysterious
           Arts
           of
           
             
               DRAWING
               ,
            
             
               ETCHING
               ,
            
             
               ENGRAVING
               ,
            
             
               LIMNING
               .
            
             
               PAINTING
               in
               OYL
               ,
            
             
               WASHING
               of
               Maps
               &
               Pictures
               .
            
          
        
         
           Also
           the
           way
           to
           Cleanse
           any
           Old
           Painting
           ,
           and
           Preserve
           the
           Colours
           .
        
         
           
             Collected
             from
             the
             Writings
             of
             the
             ablest
             Masters
             both
             Antient
             and
             Modern
             ,
             as
          
           Albert
           Durer
           ,
           P.
           Lomantius
           ,
           
             and
             divers
             others
          
           .
        
         
           Furnished
           with
           divers
           Cuts
           in
           Copper
           ,
           being
           Copied
           from
           the
           best
           Masters
           ,
           and
           here
           inserted
           for
           Examples
           for
           the
           Learner
           to
           Practice
           by
           .
        
         
           
             A
             Work
             very
             useful
             for
             all
             Gentlemen
             ,
             and
             other
             Ingenious
             Spirits
             ,
             either
             Artificers
             or
             others
             .
          
        
         
           LONDON
           :
           Printed
           by
           
             Thomas
             Ratcliff
          
           and
           
             Thomas
             Daniel
          
           ,
           for
           
             Dorman
             Newman
          
           and
           
             Richard
             Jones
          
           ,
           and
           are
           to
           be
           sold
           at
           their
           shops
           in
           
             Little
             Britain
          
           ,
           near
           the
           Lame
           Hospital
           Gate
           ,
           at
           the
           Chyrurgeons
           Arms
           ,
           and
           at
           the
           Golden
           Lyon.
           1668.
           
        
      
       
         
         
         
           To
           the
           READER
           .
        
         
           AMong
           the
           many
           Operations
           of
           Mysterious
           Nature
           ,
           the
           Intellectual
           Part
           of
           Man
           hath
           no
           equal
           :
           Among
           the
           multifarious
           Productions
           of
           Man's
           Vnderstanding
           ,
           the
           
             Art
             of
             LIMNING
          
           is
           by
           none
           excelled
           ;
           whether
           we
           consider
           the
           Grandeur
           of
           Spirit
           therein
           expressed
           ,
           or
           the
           Ingenious
           Delight
           thereby
           acquired
           .
           What
           Ray
           of
           the
           Great
           Creator's
           Image
           is
           more
           conspicuous
           in
           the
           Soul
           of
           Man
           ,
           than
           that
           of
           Intense
           Desire
           to
           produce
           Creatures
           of
           his
           own
           ?
           And
           wherein
           is
           that
           Inclination
           so
           compleatly
           answered
           ,
           as
           by
           Delineating
           the
           Workmanship
           of
           God
           in
           Artificial
           Resemblances
           contrived
           and
           wrought
           by
           his
           proper
           Wit
           ?
           Nor
           can
           any
           Satisfaction
           equal
           what
           is
           derived
           from
           the
           Perfection
           of
           these
           Designs
           .
           Are
           the
           Proportions
           exact
           ?
           How
           strongly
           do
           they
           attract
           the
           Eye
           ?
           Be
           the
           Shadowings
           accurate
           ?
           How
           strangely
           do
           they
           affect
           the
           Mind
           ?
           But
           if
           the
           Artist
           hath
           stoln
           so
           much
           of
           Promethean
           Fire
           as
           to
           add
           the
           Excellency
           of
           Life
           to
           
           well-disposed
           Lineaments
           ,
           representing
           the
           Native
           Air
           and
           sprightly
           Gesture
           of
           the
           Person
           
             in
             vive
          
           ;
           How
           unspeakably
           doth
           he
           gratify
           both
           ?
        
         
           To
           exercise
           this
           Faculty
           and
           comply
           with
           this
           Fancy
           in
           Man
           ,
           is
           this
           little
           Tract
           compiled
           ,
           in
           
             Five
             Books
          
           .
        
         
           The
           First
           lays
           down
           the
           Primordial
           Rudiments
           of
           the
           Art
           of
           Drawing
           with
           the
           Pen
           and
           Pastils
           :
           In
           a
           due
           and
           orderly
           Method
           proposing
           the
           Description
           of
           Man's
           Body
           in
           its
           distinct
           parts
           ,
           presenting
           sundry
           Draughts
           of
           them
           in
           the
           plain
           Circumferential
           Lines
           ,
           and
           giving
           Directions
           for
           the
           Proper
           Shades
           ,
           as
           of
           Naked
           Bodies
           ,
           so
           of
           Drapery
           ;
           by
           Instructions
           and
           Copies
           so
           easy
           and
           intelligible
           ,
           that
           the
           meanest
           Capacity
           need
           not
           doubt
           to
           undertake
           the
           Drawing
           of
           that
           Admirable
           Fabrick
           ,
           and
           arrive
           to
           the
           Perfection
           of
           this
           Mystery
           in
           exact
           Symmetry
           ,
           suitable
           Proportions
           ,
           and
           enlivening
           Postures
           ,
           if
           well
           perus'd
           and
           practised
           .
           For
           which
           purpose
           also
           certain
           Geometrical
           Rules
           ,
           Definitions
           ,
           and
           Figures
           are
           inserted
           ,
           to
           exemplify
           and
           adorn
           this
           Mistress
           of
           Proportion
           ;
           in
           the
           Accomplishing
           whereof
           that
           nothing
           may
           be
           defective
           ,
           some
           succinct
           Advertisements
           concerning
           Landskip
           are
           added
           in
           the
           Close
           .
        
         
           Having
           premised
           these
           more
           plain
           and
           easy
           Fundamentals
           ,
           the
           Second
           proceeds
           to
           discover
           the
           Secret
           and
           Ingenious
           Skill
           of
           Etching
           with
           
             Aqua
             fortis
          
           ;
           where
           the
           most
           perspicuous
           and
           familiar
           Ground
           possible
           is
           described
           ,
           and
           Prescriptions
           ,
           for
           carrying
           on
           and
           perfecting
           that
           Work
           ,
           no
           less
           Rational
           annexed
           .
           And
           for
           as
           much
           as
           some
           may
           perhaps
           take
           more
           Pleasure
           in
           ,
           or
           reap
           more
           Profit
           from
           ,
           that
           of
           Graving
           ;
           
           you
           have
           the
           Instruments
           most
           Necessary
           in
           that
           kind
           ,
           and
           the
           Manner
           of
           Vsing
           them
           most
           Convenient
           ,
           particularly
           demonstrated
           ;
           Together
           with
           that
           abstruse
           Slight
           of
           transferring
           the
           Copy
           upon
           the
           Copper
           .
        
         
           But
           because
           this
           alone
           may
           seem
           barely
           Mechanick
           ,
           that
           which
           suits
           with
           the
           most
           Gentile
           ,
           and
           can
           not
           derogate
           from
           the
           most
           Honourable
           ,
           is
           offered
           in
           the
           Third
           ;
           where
           the
           Requisits
           for
           
             Limning
             in
             Water-Colours
          
           are
           deposed
           ,
           the
           Gums
           and
           their
           Waters
           in
           few
           words
           digested
           ,
           the
           Colours
           particularly
           nominated
           ,
           and
           the
           true
           way
           to
           prepare
           and
           compound
           them
           specified
           :
           All
           which
           are
           but
           as
           so
           many
           Degrees
           and
           Ingredients
           to
           approach
           and
           accomplish
           the
           desirable
           and
           ultimate
           Design
           of
           Miniture
           ;
           for
           the
           Practice
           whereof
           you
           are
           throughly
           furnished
           with
           the
           Choice
           of
           the
           meetest
           Light
           ,
           Position
           ,
           and
           Implements
           at
           hand
           ,
           by
           the
           particular
           Description
           of
           Drawing
           a
           Face
           to
           the
           Life
           
             in
             ●ittle
          
           ,
           according
           to
           its
           duly
           methodized
           Progress
           at
           the
           first
           ,
           second
           ,
           and
           third
           Sitting
           ;
           not
           omitting
           the
           Ornaments
           thereunto
           perteining
           .
        
         
           And
           to
           supply
           the
           Fading
           and
           Decay
           of
           these
           ,
           the
           Fourth
           delivers
           Rules
           and
           Directions
           for
           
             P●inting
             in
             Oyl
          
           ,
           answerable
           to
           that
           depth
           of
           Judgement
           required
           in
           that
           more
           durable
           kind
           of
           Operation
           ;
           naming
           the
           proper
           Colours
           ,
           and
           declaring
           its
           peculiar
           Vtensils
           ,
           with
           accurate
           Instructions
           how
           to
           temper
           and
           diversifie
           the
           former
           ,
           for
           all
           Complexions
           and
           Garments
           ,
           of
           what
           variety
           soever
           ;
           and
           to
           use
           the
           later
           in
           the
           Artificial
           Painting
           of
           a
           Face
           ,
           the
           only
           Exemplar
           prescribed
           ,
           because
           it
           includes
           all
           the
           Art
           and
           Difficulty
           of
           this
           Science
           .
        
         
         
           The
           Fifth
           ,
           and
           last
           ,
           displays
           a
           pretty
           superficial
           Experiment
           ;
           imparting
           what
           Colours
           and
           other
           Necessaries
           are
           best
           fitted
           for
           the
           
             Washing
             or
             Colouring
             of
             Maps
             and
             Printed
             Pictures
             :
          
           And
           ,
           to
           help
           the
           divers
           Exigencies
           that
           concern
           this
           Affair
           ,
           some
           Expedients
           put
           a
           Period
           to
           the
           whole
           Work.
           
        
         
           Plainness
           and
           Brevity
           (
           which
           may
           procure
           Contempt
           from
           the
           Nice
           or
           Vulgar
           )
           are
           sufficient
           to
           recommend
           this
           Piece
           to
           Ingenious
           Aspirers
           after
           any
           of
           those
           Excellencies
           therein
           taught
           ;
           since
           they
           have
           done
           the
           Art
           and
           Artist
           Right
           ,
           in
           rescuing
           both
           ,
           from
           such
           obscure
           Intricacies
           and
           voluminous
           Impertinencies
           as
           would
           discourage
           the
           one
           ,
           or
           disparage
           the
           other
           :
           And
           these
           Muniments
           have
           so
           justly
           prevented
           all
           Censure
           ,
           that
           nothing
           can
           suggest
           the
           least
           Imputation
           of
           Difficulty
           but
           want
           of
           Diligence
           ,
           nor
           any
           one
           surmise
           it
           Tedious
           but
           the
           Slothfull
           .
        
         
           Farewell
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           A
           Necessary
           TABLE
           ,
           shewing
           the
           Chief
           Matters
           treated
           of
           in
           this
           Book
           .
           As
           ,
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               I.
               
            
             A
             description
             of
             all
             the
             External
             Parts
             of
             Mans
             Body
             .
             
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   1.
                   
                
                 Of
                 the
                 Head.
                 Page
                 2
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   2.
                   
                
                 Of
                 the
                 Ear.
                 ibid.
                 
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   3.
                   
                
                 Of
                 the
                 Eyes
                 .
                 ibid.
                 
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   4.
                   
                
                 Of
                 the
                 Nose
                 ,
                 Mouth
                 ,
                 Chin
                 ,
                 Neck
                 ,
                 and
                 Throat
                 .
                 Page
                 3
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   5.
                   
                
                 Of
                 the
                 Fore-part
                 of
                 the
                 Body
                 .
                 Page
                 5
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   6.
                   
                
                 Of
                 the
                 Hinder-part
                 of
                 the
                 Body
                 .
                 Page
                 6
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   7.
                   
                
                 Of
                 the
                 Arms.
                 Hands
                 ,
                 and
                 Fingers
                 .
                 ib.
                 
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   8.
                   
                
                 Of
                 the
                 Legs
                 ,
                 Feet
                 ,
                 and
                 Toes
                 .
                 Page
                 8
              
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               II.
               
            
             
               Of
               Actions
               ,
               Gestures
               ,
               Decorum
               ,
               Motion
               ,
               Spirit
               ,
               and
               Grace
               in
               Pictures
               rightly
               Resembled
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   1.
                   
                
                 Of
                 Action
                 or
                 Gesture
                 .
                 Page
                 9
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   2.
                   
                
                 Of
                 the
                 Passions
                 or
                 Complexions
                 .
                 Page
                 10
              
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               III.
               
            
             
               Of
               Necessary
               Instruments
               appertaining
               to
               Drawing
               .
            
             Page
             11
             
               
                 How
                 to
                 make
                 Pastils
                 of
                 several
                 Colours
                 .
                 Page
                 12
              
               
                 A
                 way
                 to
                 Draw
                 an
                 Escutcheon
                 Geometrically
                 .
                 ib.
                 
              
               
                 To
                 Draw
                 a
                 Geometrical
                 Oval
                 .
                 Page
                 15
              
               
                 Some
                 Geometrical
                 Definitions
                 .
                 Page
                 16
              
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               IV.
               
            
             
               Of
               the
               First
               Practice
               of
               Drawing
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   1.
                   
                
                 Of
                 Geometrical
                 Figures
                 .
                 Page
                 18
                 
                   
                     Five
                     Columns
                     of
                     Architecture
                     .
                     Page
                     19
                  
                
              
               
                 
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   2.
                   
                
                 Of
                 the
                 Second
                 Practice
                 of
                 Drawing
                 .
                 page
                 20
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   3.
                   
                
                 Of
                 the
                 Third
                 Practice
                 .
                 ib.
                 
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   4.
                   
                
                 Of
                 the
                 Fourth
                 Practice
                 .
                 ib.
                 
              
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               V.
               
            
             
               Directions
               for
               Drawing
               the
               Body
               of
               Man
               or
               Woman
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   1.
                   
                
                 General
                 Rules
                 for
                 drawing
                 the
                 Face
                 .
                 Page
                 21
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   2.
                   
                
                 To
                 Draw
                 a
                 Fore-right
                 Face
                 .
                 Page
                 22
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   3.
                   
                
                 To
                 Draw
                 an
                 Upright
                 Head.
                 ib.
                 
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   4.
                   
                
                 Of
                 the
                 Inclining
                 and
                 Fore-shortned
                 Face
                 .
                 Page
                 23
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   5.
                   
                
                 Of
                 the
                 Nose
                 ,
                 Mouth
                 ,
                 and
                 Chin.
                 Page
                 26
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   5.
                   
                
                 Of
                 Hands
                 ,
                 both
                 Palm
                 ,
                 Back
                 ,
                 and
                 Sides
                 ;
                 as
                 also
                 open
                 and
                 closed
                 :
                 and
                 likewise
                 of
                 Hands
                 and
                 Arms
                 joyned
                 .
                 Page
                 28
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   6.
                   
                
                 Of
                 Feet
                 in
                 several
                 Positions
                 ,
                 both
                 with
                 and
                 without
                 Measures
                 ;
                 as
                 also
                 of
                 Feet
                 and
                 Legs
                 joyned
                 together
                 .
                 Page
                 31
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   7.
                   
                
                 Of
                 the
                 Back
                 ,
                 Breast
                 ,
                 Secret
                 members
                 ,
                 Thighes
                 ,
                 Shoulders
                 ,
                 &c.
                 Page
                 34
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   8.
                   
                
                 Of
                 Whole
                 figures
                 from
                 head
                 to
                 foot
                 .
                 Page
                 36
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   9.
                   
                
                 Rules
                 of
                 Symmetrie
                 or
                 Proportion
                 to
                 be
                 observed
                 in
                 Drawing
                 the
                 whole
                 Body
                 of
                 Man
                 or
                 Woman
                 .
                 Page
                 41
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   10.
                   
                
                 The
                 Proportion
                 of
                 the
                 Body
                 of
                 Man.
                 Page
                 46
              
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               VI.
               
            
             
               Of
               Shadowing
               ,
               and
               Rules
               to
               be
               observed
               therein
               .
            
             Page
             47
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               VII
               .
            
             Of
             Drapery
             ,
             and
             Rules
             to
             be
             observed
             therein
             .
             Page
             45
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               VIII
               .
            
             Of
             Landskip
             ,
             and
             Rules
             to
             be
             observed
             therein
             .
             Page
             46
          
        
         
           
           
             Of
             Etching
             and
             Graving
             ,
             the
             Second
             Book
             .
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               I.
               
            
             
               Of
               Etching
               with
            
             Aqua
             fortis
             .
             Page
             48
             
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   1.
                   
                
                 To
                 make
                 Mr.
                 Hollar's
                 Ground
                 ,
                 and
                 how
                 to
                 Etch
                 in
                 Copper
                 ;
                 and
                 what
                 Instruments
                 ought
                 to
                 be
                 used
                 in
                 the
                 Practice
                 thereof
                 .
                 ib.
                 
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   2.
                   
                
                 How
                 to
                 prepare
                 your
                 Copper
                 .
                 Page
                 49
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   3.
                   
                
                 How
                 to
                 lay
                 the
                 Ground
                 upon
                 the
                 Plate
                 .
                 Page
                 50
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   4.
                   
                
                 How
                 to
                 Transfer
                 your
                 design
                 upon
                 the
                 Copper
                 .
                 Page
                 51
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   5.
                   
                
                 How
                 to
                 wall
                 about
                 your
                 Plate
                 with
                 Wax
                 ,
                 to
                 lay
                 on
                 your
                 
                   Aqua
                   fortis
                
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 finish
                 your
                 Work.
                 ib.
                 
              
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               II.
               
            
             Of
             Graving
             .
             
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   1.
                   
                
                 Of
                 necessary
                 Instruments
                 belonging
                 to
                 Graving
                 .
                 Page
                 53
                 
                   
                     1.
                     
                     Of
                     your
                     Oyl-stone
                     .
                     ib.
                     
                  
                   
                     2.
                     
                     Of
                     Gravers
                     .
                     Page
                     54
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   2.
                   
                
                 Of
                 several
                 wayes
                 of
                 Holding
                 the
                 Graver
                 .
                 Page
                 55
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   3.
                   
                
                 The
                 forms
                 of
                 Graving-tools
                 ,
                 as
                 also
                 the
                 manner
                 of
                 Whetting
                 your
                 Graver
                 .
                 Page
                 57
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   4.
                   
                
                 The
                 manner
                 how
                 to
                 hold
                 and
                 handle
                 your
                 Graver
                 .
                 Page
                 58
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   5.
                   
                
                 The
                 manner
                 of
                 holding
                 your
                 Hand
                 in
                 Graving
                 .
                 Page
                 59
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   6.
                   
                
                 How
                 to
                 take
                 off
                 any
                 Picture
                 ,
                 or
                 Map-letters
                 ,
                 &c.
                 upon
                 your
                 Copper
                 .
                 Page
                 61
              
            
          
        
         
           
           
             Of
             Limning
             in
             Water-colours
             ,
             the
             Third
             Book
             .
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               I.
               
            
             
               Of
               Necessaries
               belonging
               to
               Limning
            
             .
             Page
             64
             
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   1.
                   
                
                 Of
                 Gum-waters
                 used
                 in
                 Limning
                 .
                 Page
                 65
                 
                   
                     Of
                     Gum-Lake
                     .
                     ib.
                     
                  
                   
                     Of
                     Gum-Armoniack
                     .
                     Page
                     66
                  
                   
                     Of
                     Liquid
                     Gold
                     or
                     Silver
                     .
                     Page
                     67
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   2.
                   
                
                 Of
                 your
                 Grinding-stone
                 and
                 Muller
                 .
                 ib.
                 
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   3.
                   
                
                 Of
                 Colours
                 ib.
                 
              
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               II.
               
            
             
               Of
               Colours
               used
               in
               Limning
               ,
               their
               names
               ,
               and
               how
               to
               order
               them
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   1.
                   
                
                 Of
                 the
                 Names
                 of
                 Colours
                 ,
                 and
                 how
                 every
                 Colour
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 prepared
                 ;
                 whether
                 Grownd
                 ,
                 Washed
                 ,
                 or
                 Steeped
                 .
                 Page
                 68
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   2.
                   
                
                 Of
                 those
                 Colours
                 that
                 are
                 to
                 be
                 Grownd
                 ;
                 &
                 how
                 to
                 Grind
                 them
                 .
                 Page
                 70
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   3.
                   
                
                 Of
                 those
                 Colours
                 that
                 are
                 to
                 be
                 Washed
                 ,
                 and
                 how
                 to
                 Wash
                 them
                 .
                 Page
                 71
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   4.
                   
                
                 Of
                 Colours
                 to
                 be
                 Steeped
                 .
                 ib.
                 
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   5.
                   
                
                 Of
                 those
                 Colours
                 that
                 are
                 to
                 be
                 Washed
                 and
                 Grownd
                 ,
                 and
                 how
                 to
                 temper
                 them
                 in
                 your
                 Shells
                 when
                 you
                 are
                 to
                 use
                 them
                 .
                 Page
                 72
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   6.
                   
                
                 Of
                 Pencils
                 ,
                 and
                 how
                 to
                 choose
                 them
                 .
                 ib.
                 
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   7.
                   
                
                 Of
                 Compounded
                 Colours
                 .
                 Page
                 74
              
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               III.
               
            
             
               How
               to
               prepare
               a
               Table
               for
               Picture
               in
               small
               for
               Limning
               ,
               to
               make
               use
               of
               your
               Light
               ,
               the
               manner
               of
               Sitting
               in
               respect
               of
               Position
               and
               Distance
               ,
               and
               what
               necessary
               Instruments
               are
               to
               lye
               by
               you
               when
               you
               are
               at
               work
               .
            
             Page
             76
             
               
                 SECT
                 .
                 1.
                 
                 How
                 to
                 prepare
                 a
                 Table
                 for
                 a
                 Picture
                 in
                 Small
                 .
                 Page
                 76
              
               
                 
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   2.
                   
                
                 Of
                 your
                 Light.
                 ib.
                 
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   3.
                   
                
                 Of
                 the
                 manner
                 of
                 Sitting
                 .
                 Page
                 77
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   4.
                   
                
                 Of
                 such
                 Necessaries
                 as
                 are
                 to
                 lye
                 by
                 you
                 while
                 you
                 are
                 at
                 Work.
                 Page
                 78
              
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               IV.
               
            
             
               Of
               the
               Miniture
               or
               Limning
               of
               a
               Face
               in
               Water-colours
               .
            
             Page
             80
             
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   1.
                   
                
                 At
                 the
                 first
                 Operation
                 or
                 Sitting
                 .
                 Page
                 81
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   2.
                   
                
                 At
                 the
                 second
                 Operation
                 or
                 Sitting
                 .
                 Page
                 83
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   3.
                   
                
                 At
                 the
                 third
                 Operation
                 or
                 Sitting
                 .
                 Page
                 85
              
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               V.
               
            
             
               Of
               Drapery
               ,
               and
               other
               Ornaments
               belonging
               to
               a
               Picture
               in
               Miniture
               .
            
             ib.
             
             
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   1.
                   
                
                 Of
                 Drapery
                 in
                 Limning
                 .
                 Page
                 86
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   2.
                   
                
                 Of
                 other
                 Ornaments
                 in
                 Pictures
                 .
                 ib.
                 
              
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               VI.
               
            
             
               Of
               Landskip
            
             .
             Page
             87
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Painting
             in
             Oyl
             ,
             the
             Fourth
             Book
             .
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               I.
               
            
             
               Of
               the
               Names
               of
               your
               Colours
               ,
               and
               how
               to
               Grind
               and
               order
               them
               .
            
             Page
             90
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               II.
               
            
             
               Of
               your
               Easel
               ,
               Straining-Frame
               ,
               Cloth
               ,
               Pallat
               ▪
               Pencils
               ,
               and
               Stay.
            
             Page
             91
             
               
                 Names
                 of
                 several
                 sorts
                 of
                 Pencils
                 .
                 Page
                 93
              
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               III.
               
            
             
               How
               to
               order
               your
               Colours
               upon
               your
               Pallat
               ,
               and
               how
               to
               temper
               Shadows
               for
               all
               Complexions
               .
            
             ib.
             
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 For
                 a
                 Fair
                 Complexion
                 .
                 Page
                 94.
                 
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 For
                 a
                 more
                 Brown
                 or
                 Swarthy
                 Complexion
                 .
                 Page
                 95
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 For
                 a
                 Tawny
                 Complexion
                 .
                 ib.
                 
              
               
                 4.
                 
                 For
                 an
                 absolute
                 Black
                 Complexion
                 ,
                 Page
                 96
              
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               IV.
               
            
             
               What
               Pencils
               are
               usefull
               for
               the
               Painting
               of
               a
               Face
               ,
               and
               how
               to
               dispose
               them
               .
            
             Page
             97
          
           
             
             
               CHAP.
               V.
               
            
             
               How
               to
               Paint
               a
               Face
               in
               Oyl-colours
               .
            
             Page
             98
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               VI.
               
            
             
               Of
               Garments
               of
               several
               Colours
               ,
               and
               of
               their
               proper
               Colouring
               .
            
             ib.
             
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               VII
               .
            
             
               To
               temper
               Colours
               for
               several
               occasions
               .
            
             Page
             104
             
               
                 Of
                 things
                 meet
                 to
                 be
                 known
                 .
                 Page
                 105
              
               
                 The
                 Discovery
                 ,
                 how
                 to
                 Cleanse
                 any
                 Old
                 Painting
                 ,
                 so
                 as
                 to
                 Preserve
                 the
                 Colours
                 ;
                 with
                 Cautions
                 to
                 those
                 that
                 through
                 Ignorance
                 ,
                 have
                 instead
                 of
                 Cleansing
                 ,
                 quite
                 Defaced
                 ,
                 or
                 irrecoverably
                 lost
                 the
                 Beauty
                 of
                 good
                 Colours
                 in
                 and
                 Old
                 piece
                 of
                 Painting
                 .
                 Page
                 106
              
            
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Washing
             or
             Colouring
             of
             Maps
             and
             Printed
             Pictures
             :
             the
             Fifth
             Book
             .
             Page
             108
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               I.
               
            
             
               What
               things
               are
               necessary
               to
               be
               alwayes
               ready
               for
               Washing
               of
               Maps
               or
               Pictures
               .
            
             ib.
             
             
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   1.
                   
                
                 Of
                 Colours
                 for
                 Washing
                 .
                 ib.
                 
                 
                   
                     Colours
                     to
                     be
                     used
                     in
                     Washing
                     ,
                     which
                     are
                     not
                     used
                     in
                     Limning
                     .
                     Page
                     109
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   2.
                   
                
                 Of
                 other
                 Necessaries
                 .
                 ib.
                 
                 
                   
                     1.
                     
                     Of
                     Allum-water
                     ,
                     how
                     to
                     make
                     it
                     .
                     Page
                     112
                  
                   
                     2.
                     
                     How
                     to
                     make
                     Size
                     .
                     ib.
                     
                  
                   
                     3.
                     
                     How
                     to
                     Temper
                     Gold
                     to
                     write
                     with
                     a
                     Pen
                     or
                     Pencil
                     .
                     Page
                     113
                  
                   
                     4.
                     
                     Of
                     Pencils
                     .
                     Page
                     114
                  
                
              
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               II.
               
            
             
               Of
               other
               Colours
               for
               Washing
               ,
               both
               Simple
               and
               Compounded
               .
            
             ib.
             
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 How
                 to
                 make
                 a
                 Green
                 Colour
                 of
                 Copper
                 Plates
                 ,
                 ib.
                 
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 To
                 make
                 a
                 Green
                 another
                 way
                 .
                 ib.
                 
              
               
                 
                 3.
                 
                 Another
                 Green.
                 Page
                 115
              
               
                 4.
                 
                 For
                 a
                 Light
                 Green.
                 ib.
                 
              
               
                 5.
                 
                 To
                 Shadow
                 Greens
                 .
                 ib.
                 
              
               
                 6.
                 
                 Greens
                 for
                 Landskips
                 and
                 Rocks
                 .
                 ib.
                 
              
               
                 7.
                 
                 To
                 make
                 a
                 Blew
                 .
                 ib.
                 
              
               
                 8.
                 
                 Of
                 Shadowing
                 Blews
                 .
                 
                   Page
                   116
                
              
               
                 9.
                 
                 To
                 make
                 a
                 Brown.
                 ib.
                 
              
               
                 10.
                 
                 Spanish
                 Brown.
                 ib.
                 
              
               
                 11.
                 
                 How
                 to
                 make
                 an
                 Orange-colour
                 .
                 ib.
                 
              
               
                 12.
                 
                 A
                 Flesh-colour
                 .
                 Page
                 117
              
               
                 13.
                 
                 Colours
                 for
                 the
                 Sky
                 .
                 ib.
                 
              
               
                 14.
                 
                 To
                 make
                 Colours
                 for
                 Precious
                 Stones
                 .
                 ib.
                 
              
               
                 15.
                 
                 Colours
                 for
                 Landskips
                 .
                 Page
                 118
              
               
                 16.
                 
                 Colours
                 for
                 Buildings
                 .
                 Page
                 119
              
               
                 17.
                 
                 How
                 to
                 Shadow
                 every
                 Colour
                 in
                 Garments
                 or
                 Drapery
                 .
                 ib.
                 
              
            
          
           
             
               CHAP.
               III.
               
            
             
               General
               Rules
               to
               be
               observed
            
             .
             Page
             120
             
               
                 What
                 Colours
                 sets
                 off
                 best
                 together
                 .
                 ib.
                 
              
               
                 
                   SECT
                   .
                   2.
                   
                
                 Directions
                 for
                 the
                 Mixing
                 of
                 your
                 Colours
                 .
                 Page
                 121
              
            
          
        
      
       
         
         
           These
           with
           several
           other
           Books
           are
           Printed
           for
           ,
           and
           to
           be
           sold
           by
           
             Dorman
             Newman
          
           at
           the
           Chyrurgeons
           Arms
           in
           
             Little
             Britain
          
           ,
           near
           the
           Hospital
           Gate
           .
        
         
           
             Folio
             .
          
           
             A
             Large
             Body
             of
             Divinity
             ,
             in
             ten
             Books
             ,
             wherein
             the
             Fundamentals
             and
             Grounds
             of
             Religion
             are
             opened
             ,
             all
             the
             contrary
             Errors
             refuted
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Scriptures
             explained
             ;
             with
             the
             Addition
             of
             200
             sheets
             .
             By
             
               Edward
               Leigh
            
             ,
             Esq
             ;
             M.
             A.
             
          
           
             Fourty
             Sermons
             by
             the
             Right
             Reverend
             Father
             in
             God
             ,
             
               Ralph
               Brownrig
            
             ,
             late
             Bishop
             of
             Exceter
             .
          
           
             A
             Relation
             in
             form
             of
             a
             Journal
             ,
             of
             the
             Voyage
             and
             Residence
             of
             Charles
             the
             2d
             .
             King
             of
             
               Great
               Britain
            
             ,
             &c.
             
             Rendred
             into
             English
             by
             Sir
             
               William
               Lower
            
             Knight
             .
          
        
         
           
             Quarto
             .
          
           
             
               The
               Christian
               Mans
               Calling
            
             ,
             or
             a
             Treatise
             of
             making
             Religion
             ones
             Business
             ,
             wherein
             the
             nature
             of
             it
             is
             discovered
             ,
             as
             also
             the
             Christian
             directed
             how
             he
             may
             perform
             it
             in
             Religious
             Duties
             ,
             Natural
             Actions
             ,
             his
             particular
             Vocation
             ,
             his
             Family
             Direction
             ,
             and
             his
             own
             Recreations
             :
             To
             be
             read
             in
             Families
             ,
             for
             their
             Instruction
             and
             Edification
             .
             The
             First
             Part.
             
          
           
             The
             Second
             Part
             of
             this
             Treatise
             of
             the
             
               Christian
               Mans
               Calling
            
             ,
             wherein
             a
             Christian
             is
             directed
             how
             he
             may
             perform
             his
             Duty
             in
             the
             Relations
             of
             Parents
             ,
             Children
             ,
             Husbands
             ,
             Wives
             ,
             Masters
             ,
             Servants
             ,
             in
             the
             Conditions
             of
             Prosperity
             and
             Adversity
             .
          
           
             The
             Third
             and
             last
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Christian
               Mans
               Calling
            
             ;
             wherein
             the
             Christian
             is
             directed
             how
             to
             make
             Religion
             his
             Business
             ,
             in
             his
             Dealings
             with
             all
             men
             ,
             in
             the
             choice
             of
             his
             
             Companions
             ,
             in
             his
             carriage
             in
             Good
             Company
             ,
             in
             Bad
             Company
             ,
             in
             Solitariness
             ,
             or
             when
             he
             is
             alone
             ,
             on
             a
             Week-day
             from
             Morning
             to
             Night
             ,
             in
             Visiting
             the
             Sick
             ,
             on
             a
             Dying
             bed
             ;
             as
             also
             the
             Means
             how
             a
             Christian
             may
             do
             this
             ,
             and
             some
             motives
             to
             it
             .
             All
             three
             by
             
               George
               Swinnock
            
             M.
             A.
             Preacher
             of
             the
             Gospel
             late
             at
             
               Great
               Kimbel
            
             in
             the
             County
             of
             Bucks
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             and
             Practice
             of
             Faith
             ,
             or
             Faiths
             universal
             Usefulness
             and
             Quickning
             Influence
             into
             every
             Kinde
             and
             Degree
             of
             the
             Christian
             Life
             .
             Delivered
             in
             the
             Publick
             Lectures
             at
             Ipswitch
             ,
             by
             the
             late
             eminent
             and
             faithfull
             Servant
             of
             the
             Lord
             Mr.
             
               Matthew
               Lawrence
            
             ,
             Preacher
             of
             the
             Word
             to
             the
             said
             Town
             .
          
           
             The
             vertue
             and
             value
             of
             Baptism
             ,
             Catechetically
             propounded
             ,
             as
             an
             Antidote
             against
             all
             Baptism-despising
             Dictates
             .
             To
             which
             is
             added
             ,
             A
             Sermon
             Preached
             by
             the
             Author
             ,
             the
             day
             after
             his
             coming
             out
             of
             the
             Tower.
             By
             
               Zach.
               Crofton
            
             ,
             late
             Minister
             of
             
               Botolph
               Aldgate
               ,
               London
            
             .
          
           
             Farewell
             Sermons
             ,
             4to
             .
          
           
             Allyn
             '
             s
             Works
             .
          
        
         
           
             Octavo
             .
          
           
             
               God.
               Fearers
            
             are
             
               Gods
               Favourites
            
             ,
             or
             an
             Encouragement
             to
             be
             good
             in
             the
             worst
             of
             Times
             .
             Sermons
             on
             Mal.
             4.
             8.
             
             By
             
               A.
               Tucker
            
             ,
             Minister
             of
             Portsmouth
             .
          
           
             Twenty
             Sermons
             of
             Mr.
             
               James
               Nalton
            
             late
             Minister
             in
             
               Foster-lane
               ,
               London
            
             .
          
           
             The
             Christians
             great
             Interest
             .
             By
             W.
             Guthry
             
               Minister
               in
            
             Scotland
             .
          
           
             The
             Life
             of
             Cardinal
             Woolsey
             ,
             the
             famous
             Lord
             Chancellour
             of
             
               England
               ,
               &c.
            
             with
             the
             Remarks
             upon
             those
             times
             .
          
           
             Rebukes
             for
             Sin
             ,
             by
             Gods
             burning
             Anger
             ,
             by
             the
             Burning
             of
             the
             City
             ,
             the
             Burning
             of
             the
             World
             ,
             the
             Burning
             of
             the
             Wicked
             in
             Hell
             :
             With
             a
             Discourse
             of
             Heart-fixedness
             .
             By
             
               Tho.
               Doo●itel
            
             ,
             late
             Minister
             of
             
               Alphage
               ,
               London
            
             .
             12o.
             Together
             with
             several
             other
             pieces
             of
             the
             same
             Author
             .
          
           
             
               Heaven
               on
               Earth
            
             ,
             or
             ,
             the
             Best
             Friend
             in
             the
             Worst
             of
             Times
             :
             Being
             a
             Legacy
             to
             London
             .
             By
             
               J.
               J.
            
             Large
             8vo
             .
          
           
             A
             Sermon
             upon
             the
             Fire
             ,
             By
             Mr.
             
               Robert
               Elsborough
            
             ,
             
             Minister
             of
             the
             Parish
             that
             was
             lately
             St.
             
               Lawrence
               Pountney
               ,
               London
            
             ,
             4to
             .
          
           
             
               Fair
               Play
               on
               both
               sides
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Surest
             way
             to
             Heaven
             :
             Discovered
             in
             a
             Dispute
             between
             a
             Roman
             Catholick
             and
             a
             Protestant
             .
             By
             
               Samuel
               Hyeron
            
             .
          
           
             A
             Guide
             to
             young
             Women
             and
             Maidens
             ,
             directing
             them
             how
             to
             behave
             themselves
             in
             all
             estates
             ,
             relations
             ,
             and
             condiditions
             ,
             from
             their
             Childhood
             down
             to
             Old
             Age.
             By
             
               Hannah
               Woolley
            
             .
             8vo
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             now
             extant
             ,
             that
             much
             Expected
             Book
             of
             Mr.
             
               Jer.
               Burroughs
            
             ,
             Intituled
             ,
             
               Gospel
               Remission
            
             ,
             being
             the
             Second
             Part
             of
             his
             Book
             call'd
             
               The
               Evil
               of
               Sin
            
             :
             Wherein
             is
             discovered
             ,
             1.
             
             The
             many
             and
             great
             Gospel
             Mysteries
             therein
             contained
             .
             2.
             
             The
             glorious
             Effects
             proceeding
             from
             it
             .
             3.
             
             The
             great
             Mistakes
             that
             are
             made
             about
             it
             .
             4.
             
             The
             true
             Signs
             and
             Symptoms
             of
             it
             .
             5.
             
             The
             way
             and
             means
             how
             to
             obtain
             it
             .
             Published
             by
             the
             same
             hand
             ,
             in
             4to
             .
          
           
             A
             Guide
             to
             the
             true
             Religion
             ,
             directing
             to
             make
             a
             wise
             choice
             of
             that
             Religion
             men
             venture
             their
             Salvation
             upon
             .
             By
             
               J.
               Clapham
            
             ,
             M.
             A.
             
          
           
             Fanaticks
             Primmer
             ,
             for
             the
             Instruction
             of
             the
             Little
             ones
             ,
             in
             order
             to
             perfect
             Reading
             .
             By
             
               Henry
               Adis
            
             .
          
           
             The
             Compleat
             Physician
             qualified
             and
             dignisied
             .
             By
             
               E.
               Maynwaring
            
             Doctor
             in
             Physick
             .
          
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           OF
           DRAWING
           .
           The
           First
           Book
           .
        
         
           
             The
             Introduction
             .
          
           
             DRAWING
             consists
             of
             several
             Generall
             precepts
             to
             be
             learnt
             of
             every
             one
             that
             is
             desirous
             to
             attain
             to
             Perfection
             therein
             ;
             the
             practice
             of
             which
             requires
             
               Observation
               ,
               Discretion
            
             ,
             and
             Judgement
             ;
             in
             which
             ,
             
               Proportions
               ,
               Motions
            
             ,
             and
             Actions
             are
             with
             great
             care
             and
             diligence
             to
             be
             followed
             :
             And
             therefore
             he
             that
             will
             attain
             to
             the
             perfection
             of
             this
             excellent
             Practice
             ,
             it
             is
             necessary
             he
             should
             not
             be
             ignorant
             of
             Mathematical
             Demonstration
             in
             the
             Rules
             of
             Geometry
             and
             Perspective
             ;
             of
             which
             in
             this
             Book
             you
             shall
             receive
             Instructions
             .
             Of
             all
             other
             proportions
             ,
             the
             Body
             of
             Man
             hath
             the
             preheminence
             for
             excellency
             ,
             from
             which
             all
             other
             Arts
             are
             derived
             ,
             as
             many
             of
             the
             learned
             have
             concluded
             ;
             for
             Vitruvius
             noteth
             ,
             that
             the
             Architect
             hence
             took
             the
             observations
             of
             his
             Buildings
             ,
             Man
             being
             the
             first
             pattern
             of
             all
             Artificial
             things
             :
             and
             Antiquity
             hath
             so
             graced
             Painting
             ,
             (
             as
             being
             the
             chief
             Mistress
             of
             Proportion
             )
             so
             that
             all
             other
             Artificers
             are
             called
             Handy-crafts
             or
             Mechanicks
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             I.
             
          
           
             A
             description
             of
             all
             the
             External
             parts
             of
             Man's
             Body
             .
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               I.
               
                 Of
                 the
                 HEAD
              
               .
            
             
               IN
               Man's
               body
               the
               highest
               part
               is
               the
               HEAD
               ;
               the
               fore-part
               is
               called
               the
               Forehead
               ;
               the
               turning
               of
               the
               hair
               ,
               the
               Crown
               ;
               the
               root
               of
               the
               hair
               above
               the
               forehead
               ,
               the
               Center
               ;
               the
               parting
               of
               the
               hair
               ,
               (
               especially
               of
               Women
               )
               is
               called
               the
               Seam
               .
            
             
               The
               Forehead
               conteineth
               all
               the
               space
               between
               the
               root
               of
               the
               hair
               before
               ,
               and
               the
               eye-browes
               :
               the
               Pulse
               is
               the
               highest
               part
               of
               the
               forehead
               ,
               ending
               with
               the
               hair
               :
               Metone
               is
               the
               swelling
               out
               in
               the
               forehead
               above
               the
               eye-browes
               :
               the
               Temples
               lye
               betwixt
               the
               pulse
               ,
               the
               forehead
               ,
               and
               the
               ear
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               II.
               
                 Of
                 the
                 EAR.
              
               
            
             
               THe
               EAR
               turns
               between
               the
               temples
               ,
               the
               upper
               part
               of
               the
               cheek
               ,
               and
               the
               root
               of
               the
               hair
               ;
               by
               the
               side
               of
               the
               head
               the
               lower
               part
               is
               called
               the
               tipp
               ,
               in
               the
               midst
               whereof
               is
               the
               hole
               where
               the
               sound
               entreth
               in
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               SECT
               .
               III.
               
                 Of
                 the
                 EYES
              
               .
            
             
               THe
               EYE-BROWES
               are
               those
               thick
               hairs
               at
               the
               bottom
               of
               the
               forehead
               :
               the
               
                 upper
                 eye-lid
              
               is
               that
               little
               part
               which
               compasseth
               the
               upper
               part
               of
               the
               eye
               :
               the
               eye
               is
               that
               round
               ball
               which
               is
               contained
               between
               the
               upper
               and
               lower
               eye-lids
               :
               the
               
                 black
                 of
                 the
                 eye
              
               is
               the
               round
               spot
               in
               the
               midst
               of
               that
               little
               circle
               ,
               by
               virtue
               whereof
               we
               see
               ,
               and
               is
               called
               the
               apple
               or
               
                 sight
                 of
                 the
                 eye
              
               :
               the
               outward
               corner
               of
               the
               eye
               is
               next
               the
               ear
               ,
               the
               inner
               is
               toward
               the
               nose
               ;
               all
               the
               space
               between
               the
               upper
               eye-lid
               and
               the
               outward
               corner
               of
               the
               eye
               ,
               and
               the
               whole
               turning
               of
               the
               eye
               to
               the
               upper
               part
               of
               the
               cheek
               is
               called
               the
               case
               or
               
                 hollow
                 of
                 the
                 eye
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               IV.
               
                 Of
                 the
                 NOSE
                 ,
                 MOVTH
                 ,
                 CHIN
                 ,
                 NECK
                 ,
                 and
                 THROAT
                 .
              
            
             
               THe
               NOSE
               is
               between
               the
               cheeks
               ,
               descending
               from
               betwixt
               the
               eyes
               ,
               and
               endeth
               at
               the
               nostrils
               which
               hang
               out
               on
               each
               side
               at
               the
               bottom
               thereof
               ,
               each
               whereof
               hath
               an
               hole
               or
               passage
               ,
               whereby
               we
               smell
               .
            
             
               The
               lower
               end
               of
               the
               nose
               which
               standeth
               forward
               is
               called
               the
               top
               or
               point
               ,
               the
               rising
               in
               the
               midst
               the
               ridge
               or
               gristle
               ;
               the
               upper
               Cheek
               is
               that
               space
               between
               the
               ear
               ,
               the
               hollow
               of
               the
               eye
               ,
               the
               nose
               .
               
               and
               the
               lower
               Cheek
               ;
               whereof
               the
               part
               rising
               towards
               the
               eye
               ,
               is
               named
               the
               ball
               :
               the
               lower
               Cheek
               is
               bounded
               with
               the
               upper
               ,
               the
               nostrils
               ,
               the
               mouth
               ,
               the
               chin
               ,
               to
               the
               throat
               and
               the
               neck
               under
               the
               ear
               :
               the
               
                 Vpper
                 lip
              
               is
               that
               red
               piece
               of
               flesh
               above
               the
               mouth
               .
            
             
               The
               MOVTH
               is
               that
               division
               between
               the
               upper
               and
               neither
               lipps
               ,
               which
               is
               red
               like
               the
               other
               ;
               that
               concavity
               which
               cometh
               down
               from
               the
               bottom
               of
               the
               nose
               to
               the
               upper
               lip
               ,
               is
               the
               
                 gutter
                 of
                 the
                 nose
              
               .
            
             
               The
               roof
               of
               the
               mouth
               is
               called
               the
               pallat
               ;
               the
               tongue
               is
               that
               which
               moveth
               in
               the
               mouth
               ;
               the
               passage
               between
               the
               lungs
               and
               the
               mouth
               is
               called
               the
               Wind-pipe
               ,
               through
               which
               the
               breath
               passeth
               ;
               the
               gum
               is
               that
               piece
               of
               flesh
               in
               which
               the
               teeth
               are
               fastned
               ;
               the
               four
               first
               whereof
               are
               called
               dividers
               ,
               next
               unto
               which
               on
               each
               side
               are
               the
               dog-teeth
               ;
               the
               other
               five
               on
               each
               side
               with
               their
               roots
               ,
               are
               the
               grinders
               or
               cheek-teeth
               ;
               so
               that
               the
               full
               number
               of
               Teeth
               is
               thirty
               two
               .
            
             
               The
               CHIN
               or
               place
               of
               the
               beard
               ,
               is
               the
               extremity
               beneath
               the
               lip
               and
               the
               end
               of
               the
               face
               ,
               whose
               beginning
               is
               the
               root
               of
               the
               hair
               .
            
             
               The
               hinder
               part
               of
               the
               head
               under
               the
               crown
               is
               called
               the
               nape
               ,
               where
               the
               hairs
               grow
               ;
               behind
               is
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               neck
            
             
               The
               THROAT
               is
               between
               the
               chin
               and
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               body
               or
               trunk
               ,
               in
               the
               midst
               whereof
               is
               that
               rising
               called
               the
               throat-bone
               ;
               the
               concavity
               of
               the
               neck
               before
               ,
               between
               the
               end
               of
               the
               throat
               and
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               breast
               ,
               is
               the
               throat-pit
               .
            
             
             
               The
               NECK
               is
               that
               part
               behind
               between
               the
               root
               of
               the
               hair
               and
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               back-bone
               ,
               which
               on
               either
               side
               is
               joyned
               with
               the
               throat
               ,
               and
               at
               the
               lower
               end
               of
               the
               neck
               with
               the
               shoulders
               ,
               whereof
               the
               bone
               in
               the
               midst
               is
               called
               astragalus
               ,
               or
               the
               bone
               that
               knits
               the
               neck
               with
               the
               shoulders
               ;
               the
               whole
               trunk
               or
               body
               before
               containeth
               the
               upper
               fork
               of
               the
               stomack
               or
               breast
               ,
               which
               begins
               at
               the
               end
               of
               the
               throat-pit
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               V.
               
                 Of
                 the
                 FORE-PART
                 of
                 the
                 Body
                 .
              
            
             
               THe
               fore-part
               of
               the
               body
               ,
               as
               the
               Breasts
               or
               Papps
               ,
               end
               with
               the
               short
               ribs
               ,
               and
               they
               are
               called
               the
               part
               under
               the
               papps
               ,
               and
               in
               Women
               are
               called
               duggs
               ,
               the
               heads
               of
               which
               whence
               the
               milk
               is
               suckt
               out
               are
               called
               Nipples
               ;
               the
               space
               between
               the
               breasts
               or
               duggs
               at
               the
               lower
               fork
               of
               the
               breast
               is
               the
               chest
               ;
               the
               arm-pits
               are
               the
               hollows
               under
               the
               armes
               ,
               where
               the
               hairs
               grow
               .
            
             
               The
               Short-ribbs
               begin
               at
               the
               end
               of
               the
               papps
               ,
               and
               reach
               to
               the
               flanks
               near
               the
               belly
               ;
               the
               Flanks
               begin
               at
               the
               end
               of
               the
               breast
               ,
               and
               are
               called
               the
               Waste
               ;
               the
               upper
               part
               of
               the
               belly
               lies
               between
               the
               hollow
               of
               the
               breast
               ,
               the
               waste
               above
               ,
               the
               navel
               ,
               and
               the
               ribbs
               ;
               the
               knitting
               of
               the
               intrails
               is
               called
               the
               Navel
               .
            
             
               The
               Paunch
               lieth
               between
               the
               waste
               ,
               the
               privities
               ,
               and
               the
               flanks
               ,
               and
               is
               also
               called
               the
               Belly
               ;
               especially
               in
               Women
               ;
               where
               the
               hairs
               grow
               under
               the
               
               belly
               ,
               is
               the
               Privities
               ;
               the
               hollow
               compass
               at
               the
               top
               is
               called
               Corona
               ,
               the
               place
               which
               the
               urine
               passeth
               through
               is
               called
               the
               Hole
               ,
               the
               two
               little
               balls
               that
               hang
               under
               the
               Yard
               the
               Stones
               ,
               the
               Privities
               of
               a
               Woman
               are
               called
               ,
               &c.
               
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               VI.
               
                 Of
                 the
                 HINDER-PART
                 of
                 the
                 Body
                 .
              
            
             
               THe
               hinder
               part
               of
               the
               body
               called
               the
               Back
               or
               Chine
               consists
               of
               the
               shoulder-blade
               ,
               which
               is
               the
               part
               behind
               the
               shoulders
               end
               ,
               with
               part
               of
               the
               chine
               and
               loynes
               ;
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               back
               reacheth
               down
               along
               from
               the
               neck
               to
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               cleft
               of
               the
               buttocks
               ,
               the
               loynes
               lie
               between
               the
               shoulder-blades
               ;
               the
               ribbs
               and
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               chine
               to
               the
               reins
               or
               waste
               .
            
             
               The
               REINES
               reach
               from
               the
               loynes
               to
               the
               buttocks
               ,
               and
               do
               properly
               belong
               to
               the
               part
               below
               the
               Waste
               .
            
             
               The
               BVTTOCKS
               are
               that
               fleshy
               part
               which
               serve
               us
               for
               sitting
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               VII
               .
               
                 Of
                 the
                 ARMES
                 ,
                 HANDS
                 ,
                 and
                 FINGERS
                 .
              
            
             
               THe
               Arme
               contains
               the
               shoulder
               ,
               behind
               which
               is
               the
               back
               ,
               beginning
               between
               the
               neck
               and
               throat
               ,
               and
               reacheth
               to
               the
               shoulder-blade
               ,
               behind
               which
               place
               is
               properly
               called
               the
               Back
               ;
               the
               part
               
               of
               the
               arme
               from
               the
               elbow
               upward
               ,
               is
               called
               the
               
                 upper
                 brawn
              
               of
               the
               arme
               ;
               the
               Elbow
               is
               the
               bowing
               of
               the
               arme
               ,
               the
               inside
               whereof
               is
               the
               Joynt
               ;
               and
               at
               the
               lower
               part
               of
               the
               arme
               begins
               the
               Wrist
               ,
               where
               the
               arme
               is
               joyned
               to
               the
               hand
               ,
               the
               palm
               is
               the
               inside
               of
               the
               hand
               between
               the
               wrist
               and
               the
               fingers
               ,
               the
               thumb
               is
               the
               biggest
               and
               shortest
               of
               the
               fingers
               .
            
             
               The
               Fore-finger
               is
               next
               to
               the
               thumb
               ,
               the
               middle-finger
               is
               that
               which
               stands
               in
               the
               midst
               ,
               and
               is
               longer
               then
               the
               rest
               ;
               next
               unto
               this
               is
               the
               Ring-finger
               ,
               the
               Ear-finger
               or
               Little-finger
               is
               the
               least
               and
               last
               .
            
             
               The
               Joynts
               of
               the
               fingers
               are
               even
               in
               number
               ,
               viz.
               three
               upon
               each
               ,
               except
               the
               thumb
               ,
               which
               hath
               but
               two
               .
            
             
               The
               hinder
               part
               of
               the
               arme
               reacheth
               from
               the
               end
               of
               the
               shoulder
               or
               arme-pit
               to
               the
               elbow
               ,
               where
               the
               second
               part
               of
               the
               arme
               beginneth
               ,
               reaching
               to
               the
               wrist-joynt
               .
            
             
               The
               back
               of
               the
               hand
               reacheth
               from
               the
               wrist
               to
               the
               first
               joynts
               of
               the
               fingers
               ,
               and
               is
               called
               Pecten
               ,
               the
               spaces
               between
               the
               joynts
               are
               called
               Internodi
               ,
               which
               are
               two
               upon
               each
               finger
               ,
               except
               the
               thumb
               ,
               which
               hath
               but
               one
               ;
               in
               the
               space
               between
               the
               last
               joynt
               and
               the
               top
               of
               the
               finger
               is
               the
               Nail
               ,
               whose
               bowing
               is
               called
               Corona
               ,
               (
               I
               mean
               where
               it
               toucheth
               the
               flesh
               or
               skin
               .
            
             
               The
               whole
               hand
               begins
               at
               the
               wrist
               ,
               and
               reacheth
               to
               the
               top
               or
               extremity
               of
               the
               fingers
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               SECT
               .
               VIII
               .
               
                 Of
                 the
                 LEGS
                 ,
                 FEET
                 ,
                 and
                 TOES
                 .
              
            
             
               THe
               LEG
               consists
               of
               these
               parts
               ;
               the
               thigh
               ,
               which
               begins
               at
               the
               trunk
               of
               the
               body
               ,
               and
               ends
               at
               the
               knee
               ;
               the
               hollow
               of
               the
               thigh
               is
               the
               inner
               side
               below
               the
               privities
               ;
               the
               knee
               begins
               at
               the
               round
               bone
               at
               the
               end
               of
               the
               thigh
               ,
               and
               reaches
               to
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               shin-bone
               ;
               the
               instep
               begins
               at
               the
               end
               of
               the
               shin-bone
               ,
               and
               reaches
               to
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               toes
               ,
               and
               is
               called
               the
               
                 upper
                 part
                 of
                 the
                 foot
              
               ,
               the
               ancle
               is
               that
               bone
               which
               buncheth
               out
               on
               each
               side
               between
               the
               instep
               and
               beginning
               of
               the
               heel
               .
            
             
               The
               
                 Small
                 of
                 the
                 leg
              
               is
               the
               space
               between
               the
               end
               of
               the
               two
               calves
               above
               ,
               and
               the
               ancle
               ,
               instep
               ,
               and
               heel
               below
               ;
               the
               
                 Pit
                 of
                 the
                 foot
              
               is
               the
               hollow
               under
               the
               hill
               or
               higher
               bunch
               of
               the
               foot
               towards
               the
               soles
               .
            
             
               The
               TOES
               have
               also
               joynts
               as
               the
               fingers
               ,
               though
               they
               be
               somewhat
               shorter
               ,
               and
               have
               also
               nails
               in
               like
               manner
               ,
               and
               are
               otherwise
               called
               ,
               as
               1.
               2.
               3.
               4.
               5.
               
            
             
               The
               
                 hinder
                 part
                 of
                 the
                 leg
              
               begins
               under
               the
               buttock
               ,
               and
               is
               called
               the
               thigh
               ,
               and
               endeth
               at
               the
               hinder
               part
               of
               the
               knee
               ,
               called
               the
               hamme
               or
               bending
               ;
               the
               
                 calves
                 of
                 the
                 legs
              
               begin
               under
               the
               hamme
               ,
               and
               are
               two
               upon
               each
               leg
               ;
               the
               outward
               ,
               which
               endeth
               somewhat
               high
               ;
               and
               the
               inward
               ,
               which
               reacheth
               nearer
               to
               the
               small
               of
               the
               leg
               ,
               which
               diminisheth
               
               by
               degrees
               to
               that
               part
               a
               little
               above
               the
               ancle
               ;
               the
               heel
               is
               that
               part
               of
               the
               foot
               which
               riseth
               out
               backwards
               ,
               reaching
               from
               the
               end
               of
               the
               leg
               to
               the
               bottom
               of
               the
               foot
               ,
               called
               the
               Sole
               ,
               which
               beginneth
               at
               the
               end
               of
               the
               heel
               ,
               and
               reacheth
               to
               the
               top
               of
               the
               toes
               ,
               containing
               likewise
               the
               spaces
               between
               the
               joynts
               underneath
               orderly
               .
               Thus
               much
               for
               the
               External
               parts
               of
               Mans
               Body
               ;
               all
               which
               are
               deciphered
               in
               the
               Sculptures
               following
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             II.
             
          
           
             Of
             Actions
             ,
             Gestures
             ,
             Decorum
             ,
             Motion
             ,
             Spirit
             ,
             and
             Grace
             in
             Pictures
             rightly
             resembled
             .
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               I.
               
                 Of
                 Actions
                 or
                 Gestures
              
               .
            
             
               THese
               are
               those
               that
               most
               nearly
               resemble
               the
               life
               ,
               be
               it
               either
               in
               laughing
               ,
               grieving
               ,
               sleeping
               ,
               fighting
               ,
               wrastling
               ,
               running
               ,
               leaping
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               .
            
             
               Amongst
               the
               Ancients
               ,
               famous
               for
               lively
               motion
               and
               gesture
               ,
               
                 Leonard
                 Vincent
              
               deserves
               much
               ,
               whose
               custom
               was
               to
               behold
               clowns
               ,
               condemned
               persons
               ,
               and
               did
               mark
               the
               contracting
               of
               their
               browes
               ,
               the
               motions
               of
               their
               eyes
               and
               whole
               bodies
               ;
               and
               doubtless
               it
               cannot
               but
               be
               very
               expedient
               for
               an
               Artist
               in
               this
               kind
               to
               behold
               the
               variety
               of
               exercises
               ,
               that
               discover
               various
               actions
               ,
               where
               the
               motion
               is
               discovered
               between
               the
               living
               and
               the
               dead
               ,
               the
               fierce
               and
               the
               gentle
               ,
               the
               ignorant
               and
               learned
               ,
               the
               sad
               and
               the
               merry
               .
            
             
             
               
                 John
                 de
                 Bruges
              
               was
               the
               first
               inventer
               of
               Oyl-painting
               that
               deserved
               excellently
               in
               this
               particular
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               II.
               Of
               the
               Passions
               or
               Complexions
               .
            
             
               MAns
               Body
               is
               composed
               of
               the
               four
               Elements
               .
               Melancholy
               resembles
               Earth
               .
            
             
               Flegm
               the
               Water
               .
            
             
               Choler
               the
               Fire
               .
            
             
               Bloud
               the
               Air
               ;
               and
               answerable
               are
               the
               Gestures
               and
               Humours
               .
            
             
               Melancholy
               bodies
               are
               slow
               ,
               heavy
               ,
               and
               restrained
               ;
               and
               the
               consequents
               are
               anxiety
               ,
               disquietness
               ,
               sadness
               ,
               stubbornness
               ,
               &c.
               in
               which
               horrour
               and
               dispair
               will
               appear
               .
            
             
               Flegmatick
               bodies
               are
               simple
               ,
               humble
               ,
               mercifull
               .
            
             
               Sanguine
               bodies
               are
               temperate
               ,
               modest
               ,
               gracious
               ,
               princely
               ,
               gentle
               ,
               and
               merry
               ;
               to
               whom
               these
               affections
               of
               the
               minde
               best
               agree
               ,
               viz.
               love
               ,
               delight
               ,
               pleasure
               ,
               desire
               ,
               mirth
               ,
               and
               hope
               .
            
             
               Cholerick
               bodies
               are
               violent
               ,
               boysterous
               ,
               arrogant
               ,
               bold
               ,
               and
               fierce
               ;
               to
               whom
               these
               passions
               appertain
               ,
               anger
               ,
               hatred
               ,
               and
               boldness
               ;
               and
               accordingly
               the
               skilfull
               Artist
               expresses
               these
               motions
               of
               these
               several
               bodies
               ,
               which
               ought
               Philosophically
               to
               be
               understood
               .
            
             
               Now
               to
               proceed
               according
               to
               our
               promised
               Method
               ,
               to
               the
               Practical
               part
               ;
               and
               here
               first
               the
               Learner
               must
               be
               provided
               with
               several
               Instruments
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             III.
             
          
           
             Of
             necessary
             Instruments
             appertaining
             to
             Drawing
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             SAllow
             coals
             split
             into
             the
             forms
             of
             Pencils
             ,
             which
             you
             may
             best
             have
             of
             those
             that
             sell
             Charcoal
             ready
             burnt
             for
             your
             use
             ;
             these
             are
             to
             be
             prepared
             by
             sharpning
             them
             at
             the
             point
             ,
             their
             use
             is
             to
             touch
             over
             your
             Draught
             lightly
             at
             the
             first
             :
             you
             may
             know
             Sallow
             coals
             from
             others
             by
             the
             fineness
             of
             their
             grain
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             You
             must
             also
             have
             a
             Feather
             of
             a
             Ducks
             wing
             ,
             with
             which
             you
             may
             wipe
             out
             at
             pleasure
             what
             you
             desire
             to
             alter
             in
             your
             Draught
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Black-lead
             Pencils
             ,
             to
             go
             over
             your
             Draught
             more
             exactly
             the
             second
             time
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             Pens
             made
             of
             a
             Ravens
             quill
             ,
             to
             finish
             your
             design
             ;
             which
             will
             strike
             a
             more
             neat
             stroke
             then
             the
             common
             quill
             :
             but
             you
             must
             be
             very
             exact
             here
             ,
             for
             there
             is
             no
             altering
             what
             you
             do
             with
             the
             Pen.
             
          
           
             5.
             
             A
             Rule
             and
             a
             pair
             of
             Compasses
             with
             three
             Points
             to
             take
             in
             and
             out
             ;
             one
             for
             Chalk
             ,
             another
             for
             Black
             lead
             ,
             or
             red
             Chalk
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             Paste
             .
             The
             use
             of
             the
             Compasses
             is
             required
             in
             most
             things
             you
             draw
             ,
             which
             you
             are
             to
             use
             after
             your
             out-stroke
             is
             done
             ,
             by
             trying
             how
             near
             your
             Draught
             and
             Pattern
             agree
             ,
             and
             this
             being
             only
             toucht
             out
             in
             Charcoal
             ,
             you
             may
             alter
             at
             pleasure
             .
          
           
           
             6.
             
             Pastils
             made
             of
             several
             Colours
             ,
             to
             draw
             upon
             coloured
             Paper
             or
             Parchment
             ,
             the
             making
             whereof
             is
             as
             followeth
             .
          
           
             
               How
               to
               make
               Pastils
               of
               several
               colours
               .
            
             Take
             the
             Colour
             that
             you
             intend
             to
             make
             your
             Pastil
             and
             grind
             it
             dry
             ,
             or
             rather
             only
             bruise
             it
             somewhat
             fine
             ;
             to
             your
             Colour
             (
             whatsoever
             it
             be
             )
             add
             a
             reasonable
             quantity
             of
             Plaister
             of
             Paris
             burnt
             and
             finely
             sifted
             ,
             mix
             and
             incorporate
             the
             Colour
             and
             Plaister
             together
             with
             fair
             Water
             till
             it
             be
             stiff
             like
             Clay
             or
             Dough
             ;
             then
             take
             it
             and
             rowl
             it
             between
             your
             hands
             into
             long
             pieces
             ,
             about
             the
             bigness
             of
             the
             shank
             of
             a
             Tobacco-pipe
             ,
             then
             lay
             them
             in
             the
             Sun
             or
             Wind
             to
             dry
             .
             They
             being
             thus
             dryed
             are
             ready
             for
             use
             ,
             being
             finely
             scraped
             to
             a
             very
             small
             point
             ;
             and
             if
             they
             be
             short
             ,
             put
             them
             into
             an
             ordinary
             Goose-quill
             to
             lengthen
             them
             .
          
           
             And
             here
             note
             ,
             that
             you
             may
             by
             this
             means
             make
             Pastils
             of
             what
             Colour
             you
             please
             ,
             either
             simple
             or
             compounded
             ,
             if
             you
             know
             what
             ingredients
             and
             mixtures
             will
             make
             such
             a
             Colour
             as
             you
             desire
             ;
             which
             you
             will
             understand
             in
             the
             third
             Book
             ,
             where
             we
             treat
             of
             the
             Mixture
             of
             Colours
             .
             And
             further
             observe
             ,
             that
             the
             Plaister
             of
             Paris
             is
             only
             to
             binde
             the
             Colours
             together
             ;
             and
             therefore
             according
             as
             your
             Colour
             or
             Colours
             you
             are
             to
             make
             are
             more
             hard
             or
             more
             soft
             ,
             you
             must
             add
             the
             greater
             or
             lesser
             quantity
             of
             Plaister
             .
          
           
             By
             this
             means
             of
             tempering
             and
             mixing
             of
             several
             Colours
             together
             ,
             you
             may
             make
             (
             indeed
             )
             whatsoever
             
             colour
             you
             please
             ;
             as
             all
             manner
             of
             Colours
             for
             the
             Face
             or
             Bodie
             of
             Man
             or
             Woman
             ,
             all
             kind
             of
             Greens
             for
             Landskip
             ,
             for
             Rocks
             ,
             Skies
             ,
             Sun-beams
             ;
             all
             colours
             for
             Buildings
             ,
             with
             their
             Shadows
             .
          
           
             These
             Pastils
             are
             very
             fine
             and
             commodious
             for
             drawing
             upon
             coloured
             paper
             ,
             and
             therefore
             I
             would
             have
             you
             ,
          
           
             7.
             
             Provide
             your self
             also
             of
             fine
             Blew
             paper
             ;
             some
             light-coloured
             ,
             other-some
             more
             sad
             ;
             as
             also
             with
             Paper
             of
             divers
             other
             colours
             ,
             which
             now
             is
             very
             common
             to
             be
             sold
             in
             many
             places
             .
          
           
             8.
             
             Have
             alwayes
             in
             a
             readiness
             by
             you
             the
             Crumbs
             of
             fine
             Manchet
             or
             White-bread
             ;
             the
             use
             whereof
             is
             ,
             when
             you
             have
             drawn
             any
             thing
             with
             Black-lead
             that
             disliketh
             you
             ,
             you
             may
             strew
             some
             of
             these
             Crumbs
             upon
             the
             defective
             part
             ,
             and
             with
             a
             linnen
             cloth
             rub
             hard
             upon
             that
             place
             ,
             and
             it
             will
             fetch
             out
             the
             Black-lead
             ,
             and
             leave
             the
             Paper
             or
             Parchment
             fair
             and
             white
             .
             It
             is
             also
             usefull
             when
             you
             have
             finished
             a
             piece
             ,
             either
             Head
             ,
             Leg
             ,
             Arme
             ,
             or
             whole
             Bodie
             with
             Black-lead
             ,
             and
             would
             trace
             it
             over
             with
             Ink
             to
             finish
             it
             ,
             the
             Black-lead
             will
             be
             seen
             in
             many
             places
             ,
             being
             thicker
             then
             the
             line
             of
             your
             Pen
             ;
             wherefore
             when
             you
             have
             finished
             your
             Drawing
             with
             Ink
             ,
             and
             that
             dry
             ,
             rub
             it
             over
             with
             these
             Crumbs
             ,
             and
             it
             will
             not
             only
             take
             off
             the
             superfluous
             Black-lead
             ,
             but
             all
             other
             spots
             of
             your
             Paper
             .
          
           
             
             
               
                 
                   Escutchion
                
                 
                   An
                   Ovall
                
              
            
          
           
             
             
               A
               way
               to
               Draw
               an
               Escutcheon
               Geometrically
               .
            
             
               FIrst
               strike
               a
               Circle
               at
               pleasure
               ,
               as
               your
               occasion
               requires
               .
            
             
               Then
               strike
               the
               Diameter
               as
               BC
               ,
               then
               set
               one
               foot
               of
               the
               Compasses
               in
               B
               ,
               and
               strike
               the
               crooked
               lines
               DD
               and
               DD
               ,
               then
               keeping
               the
               Compasses
               at
               the
               same
               distance
               ,
               strike
               the
               other
               crooked
               lines
               EE
               and
               EE
               ,
               then
               where
               they
               do
               intersect
               as
               FF
               ,
               there
               strike
               the
               cross
               Diameter
               ,
               then
               divide
               the
               upper
               Semidiameter
               into
               three
               parts
               ,
               and
               take
               two
               of
               them
               ,
               there
               make
               the
               Cross-line
               ,
               by
               setting
               one
               foot
               of
               the
               Compasses
               in
               B
               ,
               and
               make
               the
               crooked
               line
               GG
               ,
               then
               at
               the
               same
               distance
               make
               the
               crooked
               line
               HH
               ,
               by
               setting
               them
               in
               C
               ,
               then
               strike
               the
               line
               II
               ,
               then
               measure
               two
               or
               three
               of
               those
               parts
               ,
               and
               set
               off
               towards
               B
               and
               C
               ,
               then
               set
               the
               Compasses
               in
               K
               ,
               and
               strike
               the
               lines
               L
               L
               and
               LL
               ,
               then
               set
               the
               Ruler
               in
               MM
               and
               MM
               ,
               and
               strike
               the
               lines
               in
               NN
               and
               NN
               ,
               and
               divide
               the
               lower
               Semicircle
               in
               two
               equal
               parts
               ,
               then
               set
               the
               Compass
               in
               O
               ,
               and
               strike
               the
               lines
               PP
               and
               PP
               from
               AA
               ,
               then
               measure
               from
               MN
               downwards
               ,
               five
               of
               those
               parts
               of
               the
               upper
               measure
               ,
               then
               set
               the
               Compasses
               at
               N5
               and
               N5
               ,
               and
               strike
               the
               lines
               KP
               and
               KP
               ,
               and
               you
               have
               your
               desire
               .
            
          
           
             
               To
               Draw
               a
               Geometrical
               Oval
               .
            
             
               THis
               Oval
               is
               drawn
               by
               drawing
               two
               equal
               Circles
               ,
               then
               set
               the
               Compasses
               in
               D
               ,
               and
               strike
               
               the
               Arch
               BC
               ,
               and
               at
               the
               same
               distance
               set
               them
               in
               D
               ,
               and
               strike
               the
               Arch
               FE
               ,
               then
               set
               them
               in
               G
               ,
               and
               strike
               the
               Arch
               CF
               ,
               then
               set
               them
               in
               H
               ,
               and
               strike
               the
               Arch
               BE.
               
            
          
           
             
               Some
               Geometrical
               Definitions
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               A
               Point
               is
               void
               of
               magnitude
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               A
               Line
               is
               a
               length
               without
               breadth
               or
               thickness
               ;
               and
               of
               the
               three
               kinds
               of
               magnitudes
               in
               Geometry
               ,
               viz.
               Length
               ,
               Breadth
               ,
               and
               Thickness
               ,
               a
               Line
               is
               the
               first
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               The
               ends
               or
               bounds
               of
               a
               Finite-line
               are
               points
               ;
               but
               in
               a
               circular
               Line
               ,
               the
               points
               motion
               returns
               to
               the
               place
               where
               it
               first
               began
               ,
               and
               so
               makes
               the
               Line
               infinite
               ,
               and
               the
               ends
               or
               bounds
               undeterminate
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               A
               Right-line
               lyeth
               equally
               betwixt
               his
               points
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               A
               Superficies
               hath
               onely
               Length
               and
               Breadth
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               A
               plain
               Superficies
               is
               that
               which
               lyeth
               equally
               between
               his
               Lines
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               A
               plain
               Angle
               is
               the
               inclination
               ,
               or
               bowing
               of
               two
               Lines
               the
               one
               to
               the
               other
               ,
               the
               one
               touching
               the
               other
               ,
               and
               not
               being
               directly
               joyned
               together
               :
               an
               Angle
               commonly
               signed
               by
               three
               Letters
               ,
               the
               middlemost
               whereof
               shews
               the
               Angular
               point
               .
            
             
               8.
               
               If
               the
               Lines
               that
               contain
               the
               Angle
               be
               right
               Lines
               ,
               then
               it
               is
               called
               a
               Right-lined
               Angle
               .
            
             
               9.
               
               When
               a
               Right-line
               standing
               upon
               a
               Right-line
               ,
               makes
               the
               Angles
               on
               either
               side
               equal
               ,
               then
               either
               of
               these
               Angles
               is
               a
               Right-angle
               ,
               and
               Right-line
               
               which
               stands
               erected
               ,
               is
               called
               a
               Perpendicular-Line
               to
               that
               wherein
               it
               stands
               .
            
             
               10.
               
               An
               Obtuse-angle
               is
               that
               which
               is
               greater
               then
               a
               Right-angle
               .
            
             
               11.
               
               An
               Acute-angle
               is
               less
               then
               a
               Right-angle
               .
            
             
               12.
               
               A
               Limit
               or
               Term
               ,
               is
               the
               end
               of
               every
               thing
               .
            
             
               13.
               
               A
               Figure
               is
               that
               which
               is
               contained
               under
               one
               Limit
               or
               Term
               ,
               or
               many
               ,
               viz.
               a
               Round-line
               ,
               three
               Right-lines
               ,
               four
               Right-lines
               ,
               five
               Right-lines
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               14.
               
               A
               Circle
               is
               a
               plain
               figure
               contained
               under
               one
               Line
               ,
               called
               a
               Circumference
               .
            
             
               15.
               
               A
               Diameter
               of
               a
               Circle
               is
               a
               Right-line
               drawn
               by
               the
               Center
               thereof
               ,
               and
               ending
               at
               the
               Circumference
               .
            
             
               16.
               
               A
               Semi-circle
               is
               a
               figure
               contained
               under
               the
               Diameter
               ,
               and
               that
               part
               of
               the
               Circumference
               cut
               off
               by
               the
               Diameter
               .
            
             
               17.
               
               A
               Section
               or
               portion
               of
               a
               Circle
               ,
               is
               a
               figure
               contained
               under
               a
               Right-line
               ,
               and
               a
               part
               of
               the
               Circumference
               greater
               or
               less
               then
               a
               Semi-circle
               .
            
             
               18.
               
               Right-lined
               figures
               are
               such
               as
               are
               contained
               under
               Right
               lines
               .
            
             
               19.
               
               Three-sided
               figures
               are
               such
               as
               are
               contained
               under
               three
               Right
               lines
               .
            
             
               20.
               
               Four-sided
               figures
               are
               such
               as
               are
               contained
               under
               four
               Right
               lines
               .
            
             
               21.
               
               Many-sided
               figures
               are
               such
               as
               have
               more
               sides
               then
               four
               .
            
             
               22.
               
               All-three-sided
               figures
               are
               called
               Triangles
               .
            
             
               23.
               
               Four-sided
               figures
               a
               Quadrater
               ;
               a
               Square
               is
               that
               whose
               Sides
               are
               equal
               ,
               and
               his
               Angles
               right
               .
            
             
             
               24.
               
               A
               Long-square
               is
               that
               which
               hath
               right
               Angles
               ,
               but
               unequal
               Sides
               .
            
             
               25.
               
               A
               Rhombus
               is
               a
               figure
               having
               four
               equal
               Sides
               ,
               but
               not
               right
               Angles
               .
            
             
               26.
               
               A
               Rhomboides
               is
               a
               figure
               whose
               opposite
               Sides
               are
               equal
               ,
               and
               whose
               opposite
               Angles
               are
               also
               equal
               ,
               but
               it
               hath
               neither
               Sides
               ,
               nor
               equal
               Angles
               .
            
             
               27.
               
               All
               other
               figures
               of
               four
               sides
               ,
               besides
               these
               ,
               are
               called
               Trapez
               ,
               as
               such
               are
               all
               figures
               of
               four
               sides
               ,
               in
               which
               is
               observed
               no
               equality
               of
               Sides
               or
               Angles
               .
            
             
               28.
               
               Parallel
               or
               equi-distant
               Right-lines
               are
               such
               ,
               which
               being
               in
               one
               and
               the
               same
               Superficies
               ,
               and
               produced
               infinitely
               on
               both
               sides
               ,
               do
               never
               in
               any
               part
               concurr
               ,
               but
               still
               retain
               the
               same
               distance
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             IV.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             first
             Practice
             of
             Drawing
             .
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               I.
               
                 Of
                 Geometrical
                 Figures
              
               .
            
             
               
                 THE
                 :
                 V
                 :
                 ORDERS
                 OF
                 ARCHITECT
                 .
              
               
                 Tuscan
                 .
                 Dorica
                 .
                 Jonica
                 .
                 Corinthia
                 .
                 Composita
                 .
              
               
                 Place
                 this
                 page
                 19
              
            
             
               The
               Circle
               will
               help
               you
               in
               all
               
                 Orbicular
                 forms
              
               ;
               as
               ,
               the
               Sun
               in
               its
               glory
               ,
               the
               Moon
               either
               full
               or
               crescent
               ,
               and
               infinite
               other
               Circular
               shapes
               .
               The
               Oval
               is
               a
               direction
               for
               the
               Face
               ,
               for
               the
               mouth
               or
               foot
               of
               a
               wine
               or
               beer-glass
               ,
               the
               mouth
               of
               a
               well
               ,
               &c.
               
               The
               Square
               is
               assistant
               to
               you
               in
               confining
               your
               Picture
               you
               are
               to
               copie
               ,
               and
               keeping
               it
               within
               bounds
               .
               The
               Triangle
               for
               the
               half-face
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               Figures
               following
               you
               will
               easily
               discern
               .
               The
               Cone
               will
               help
               you
               in
               drawing
               of
               Flute-Colasses
               ,
               now
               much
               in
               fashion
               ;
               as
               also
               in
               Spire-Steeples
               and
               tops
               of
               Towers
               .
               The
               Cylinder
               will
               be
               of
               good
               use
               in
               drawing
               of
               all
               manner
               of
               
                 Columns
                 ,
                 Pillars
              
               and
               Pilasters
               ,
               with
               their
               Ornaments
               .
               These
               (
               indeed
               )
               are
               so
               usefull
               ,
               that
               hardly
               any
               thing
               can
               be
               effected
               in
               which
               they
               they
               are
               not
               ingredient
               .
            
             
               And
               now
               ,
               since
               it
               falls
               in
               my
               way
               so
               opportunely
               ,
               I
               will
               insert
               the
               sign
               of
               the
               Five
               orders
               of
               Architecture
               ,
               that
               you
               may
               know
               them
               when
               you
               see
               them
               either
               painted
               ,
               or
               built
               in
               Brick
               or
               Stone
               .
            
             
               
                 Place
                 here
                 the
                 Five
              
               Columns
               
                 of
                 Architecture
              
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               SECT
               .
               II.
               
                 Of
                 the
                 second
                 practice
                 of
                 Drawing
                 .
              
            
             
               HAving
               practised
               these
               Figures
               ,
               proceed
               to
               the
               drawing
               of
               
                 Cherries
                 ,
                 Pears
                 ,
                 Apples
                 ,
                 Apricocks
                 ,
                 Peaches
                 ,
                 Grapes
                 ,
                 Strawberries
                 ,
                 Peascods
                 ,
                 Butterflies
                 ,
              
               and
               such
               like
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               III.
               
                 Of
                 the
                 third
                 Practice
              
               .
            
             
               IMitate
               Flowers
               ,
               as
               
                 Roses
                 ,
                 Tulips
                 ,
                 Carnations
              
               ,
               &c.
               
               Also
               Beasts
               ;
               first
               the
               more
               heavy
               and
               dull
               ,
               as
               the
               Elephant
               ,
               the
               Bear
               ,
               the
               Bull
               ,
               the
               Goat
               ,
               the
               Sheep
               ,
               &c.
               
               Then
               them
               more
               fleet
               and
               nimble
               ,
               as
               the
               Stag
               ,
               the
               Hart
               ,
               the
               Nag
               ,
               the
               Vnicorn
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               .
               Then
               practice
               Birds
               ,
               as
               the
               Eagle
               ,
               the
               Swan
               ,
               the
               Parrot
               ,
               the
               King-fisher
               ,
               the
               Partridge
               ,
               the
               Pheasant
               ,
               and
               such
               like
               .
               Then
               Fishes
               ,
               as
               the
               
                 Whale
                 ,
                 Salmon
                 ,
                 Herring
                 ,
                 Pike
                 ,
                 Carp
                 ,
                 Thornback
                 ,
                 Lobster
                 ,
              
               &c.
               
               Of
               all
               which
               there
               are
               Books
               to
               be
               bought
               at
               very
               reasonable
               rates
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               IV.
               
                 Of
                 the
                 fourth
                 Practice
              
               .
            
             
               IMitate
               the
               Body
               and
               Parts
               of
               the
               Body
               of
               Man
               ;
               in
               the
               practice
               whereof
               beware
               of
               the
               common
               errors
               usually
               commited
               ,
               as
               of
               drawing
               the
               Head
               
               too
               big
               for
               the
               Body
               ,
               and
               others
               the
               like
               ;
               which
               to
               prevent
               ,
               you
               have
               here
               presented
               to
               your
               view
               the
               
                 Heads
                 ,
                 Noses
                 ,
                 Mouthes
                 ,
                 Hands
                 ,
                 Arms
                 ,
                 Feet
                 ,
                 Legs
                 ,
                 Bodies
                 ,
              
               also
               
                 whole
                 Figures
                 of
                 Men
                 ,
                 Women
                 ,
              
               and
               Children
               in
               several
               postures
               ,
               being
               Copies
               of
               the
               best
               Masters
               extant
               ,
               with
               Rules
               and
               directions
               for
               Drawing
               every
               particular
               member
               of
               the
               bodie
               ,
               and
               that
               I
               would
               have
               you
               now
               to
               practice
               ,
               you
               having
               gone
               sufficiently
               forward
               with
               the
               others
               before
               noted
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             V.
             
          
           
             Directions
             for
             Drawing
             the
             Body
             of
             Man
             or
             Woman
             .
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               I
               
                 General
                 Rules
                 for
                 Drawing
                 the
                 Face
                 .
              
            
             
               IN
               Drawing
               the
               Face
               ,
               observe
               its
               motion
               whether
               forward
               ,
               upward
               ,
               downward
               ,
               or
               side-wayes
               ,
               by
               your
               Eye
               ;
               touch
               lightly
               the
               features
               where
               the
               Eyes
               ,
               Nose
               ,
               Mouth
               ,
               and
               Chin
               should
               stand
               ,
               and
               then
               go
               over
               them
               more
               perfectly
               .
               The
               Circle
               ,
               Squares
               ,
               and
               Triangles
               that
               are
               used
               in
               a
               Face
               ,
               serve
               to
               guide
               your
               judgement
               where
               to
               place
               the
               several
               features
               .
            
             
               Observe
               diligently
               the
               principal
               Muscles
               of
               a
               Face
               ,
               these
               appear
               most
               in
               an
               aged
               man
               or
               womans
               face
               .
            
             
               There
               is
               usually
               a
               three-fold
               proportion
               observed
               
               in
               a
               Face
               :
               1.
               
               From
               the
               top
               of
               the
               Fore-head
               to
               the
               Eye-browes
               :
               2.
               
               From
               the
               Eye-browes
               to
               the
               bottom
               of
               the
               Nose
               :
               3.
               
               From
               thence
               to
               the
               bottom
               of
               the
               Chin
               ;
               but
               in
               some
               the
               Fore-head
               is
               lower
               ;
               others
               Noses
               are
               longer
               .
            
             
               The
               Distances
               between
               the
               Eyes
               ,
               is
               the
               length
               of
               one
               Eye
               in
               a
               full
               face
               ;
               but
               in
               a
               three-quarter
               ,
               or
               side-face
               ,
               the
               distance
               is
               lessened
               answerable
               .
            
             
               The
               Nostril
               ought
               to
               be
               plac'd
               exactly
               against
               the
               corner
               of
               the
               Eye
               .
            
             
               In
               a
               fat
               Face
               you
               will
               perceive
               the
               Cheeks
               swell
               ,
               in
               a
               lean
               Face
               the
               Jaw-bones
               stick
               out
               ,
               and
               the
               Cheeks
               fall
               in
               .
            
             
               A
               smiling
               countenance
               is
               discerned
               by
               the
               Mouth
               ,
               when
               the
               corners
               of
               the
               Mouth
               turn
               up
               a
               little
               .
            
             
               A
               frowning
               countenance
               is
               discerned
               in
               the
               Fore-head
               ,
               Eye-browes
               ,
               bending
               and
               somewhat
               wrinkling
               about
               the
               top
               of
               the
               Nose
               ,
               &c.
               
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               II.
               
                 To
                 draw
                 a
                 Fore-right
                 Face
              
               .
            
             
               MAke
               the
               form
               of
               a
               perfect
               Oval
               divided
               into
               three
               equal
               parts
               by
               two
               Lines
               ;
               in
               the
               first
               part
               place
               the
               Eyes
               ,
               in
               the
               second
               part
               the
               Nostrils
               ,
               and
               in
               third
               part
               the
               Mouth
               .
            
             
               Note
               ,
               that
               the
               Eyes
               must
               be
               distant
               one
               from
               the
               other
               the
               length
               of
               one
               of
               the
               Eyes
               ,
               and
               that
               their
               inner
               corners
               be
               perfectly
               over
               the
               out-side
               of
               the
               Nostrils
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               SECT
               .
               III.
               
                 To
                 draw
                 an
                 Vp-right
                 Head.
              
               
            
             
               WHich
               is
               made
               with
               three
               Lines
               equal
               every
               way
               ,
               either
               upwards
               ,
               downwards
               ,
               higher
               or
               lower
               ;
               and
               that
               must
               be
               divided
               as
               the
               former
               into
               three
               equal
               parts
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               Example
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               IV.
               
                 Of
                 the
                 Inclining
                 and
                 Fore-shortned
                 Face
                 .
              
            
             
               THis
               is
               plainly
               seen
               by
               the
               Lines
               ,
               how
               they
               concord
               together
               ,
               and
               you
               may
               with
               facility
               draw
               in
               their
               proper
               places
               the
               Nose
               ,
               Mouth
               ,
               and
               other
               parts
               with
               a
               little
               practice
               ,
               and
               observng
               diligently
               the
               Examples
               following
               .
            
             
             
             
               In
               these
               Formes
               you
               must
               be
               very
               perfect
               ,
               it
               being
               a
               Rule
               that
               in
               most
               Faces
               you
               may
               have
               occasion
               to
               make
               use
               of
               :
               for
               of
               all
               the
               parts
               of
               Mans
               bodie
               the
               Face
               is
               the
               most
               diffcult
               .
               But
               having
               got
               the
               Proportions
               with
               their
               Measures
               ,
               you
               will
               be
               able
               (
               which
               way
               soever
               a
               Face
               turns
               )
               to
               form
               it
               out
               ,
               whatever
               proportion
               your
               Face
               is
               you
               are
               to
               imitate
               ,
               so
               must
               your
               Out-stroke
               be
               formed
               ;
               whether
               long
               ,
               round
               ,
               fat
               ,
               or
               lean
               .
            
             
               Because
               presidents
               are
               most
               usefull
               ,
               I
               have
               here
               thought
               good
               to
               give
               you
               the
               forms
               of
               several
               Eyes
               more
               at
               large
               ,
               by
               which
               you
               may
               with
               more
               ease
               know
               the
               truth
               of
               their
               Proportions
               .
            
             
               As
               also
               Ears
               ,
               which
               are
               exactly
               to
               be
               known
               ;
               and
               then
               the
               forms
               of
               several
               Noses
               and
               Mouthes
               ;
               all
               which
               are
               taken
               from
               eminent
               Masters
               ,
               as
               Palma
               and
               others
               .
               [
               
                 In
                 the
                 following
                 Page
              
               .
               ]
            
             
          
           
             
               SECT
               V.
               
                 Of
                 the
                 Nose
                 ,
                 Mouth
                 ,
                 and
                 Chin.
                 
              
            
             
               THe
               Nose
               is
               the
               most
               eminent
               part
               of
               the
               Face
               ;
               in
               which
               observe
               the
               hollowness
               ,
               roundness
               ,
               and
               the
               Nostrils
               ,
               as
               they
               appear
               in
               these
               several
               Figures
               borrowed
               from
               Fiolet
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               Describe
               a
               Semi-circle
               downwards
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Make
               the
               Holes
               of
               the
               Nose
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               The
               addition
               of
               the
               Nostrils
               .
            
             
          
           
             
             
               SECT
               .
               V.
               
                 Of
                 Hands
                 ,
                 both
                 Palm
                 ,
                 Back
                 ,
                 and
                 Sides
                 ;
                 as
                 also
                 open
                 and
                 closed
                 :
                 and
                 likewise
                 of
                 Hands
                 and
                 Armes
                 joyned
                 .
              
            
             
               HAving
               sufficiently
               practised
               the
               Drawing
               of
               Mouthes
               and
               Noses
               ,
               let
               your
               next
               exercise
               be
               in
               drawing
               of
               Hands
               in
               all
               positions
               ,
               both
               by
               measures
               ,
               and
               without
               ;
               as
               also
               Hands
               and
               Armes
               joyned
               .
            
             
               
               
               
               
               
            
          
           
             
             
               SECT
               .
               VI.
               
                 Of
                 Feet
                 in
                 several
                 positions
                 ,
                 both
                 with
                 and
                 without
                 measures
                 ,
                 as
                 also
                 of
                 Feet
                 and
                 Legs
                 joyned
                 together
                 .
              
            
             
               BEing
               expert
               in
               the
               Drawing
               of
               Hands
               and
               Arms
               ,
               proceed
               to
               the
               Drawing
               of
               Feet
               in
               all
               postures
               ,
               both
               with
               and
               without
               measures
               ;
               which
               having
               attained
               ,
               exercise
               your self
               in
               Drawing
               of
               Legs
               and
               Feet
               joyned
               together
               ,
               as
               before
               you
               did
               of
               Hands
               and
               Arms
               ;
               that
               so
               you
               understanding
               the
               particulars
               of
               the
               whole
               Bodie
               ,
               you
               come
               with
               the
               more
               judgement
               to
               that
               great
               difficulty
               of
               Figures
               of
               the
               whole
               Bodie
               of
               Man.
               To
               help
               you
               therein
               ,
               I
               have
               set
               before
               you
               the
               easiest
               and
               truest
               Rules
               that
               the
               best
               Masters
               of
               Proportions
               have
               published
               ,
               with
               a
               Discourse
               of
               their
               true
               Measures
               :
               which
               will
               be
               the
               more
               easie
               ,
               if
               you
               seriously
               weigh
               the
               foregoing
               Chapter
               ,
               treating
               of
               all
               the
               external
               parts
               of
               Mans
               bodie
               ,
               for
               then
               you
               will
               have
               occasion
               to
               observe
               it
               ;
               but
               first
               exercise
               your self
               in
               following
               these
               examples
               of
               Feet
               ,
               as
               also
               of
               Feet
               and
               Legs
               joyned
               together
               .
               [
               
                 See
                 the
                 2.
                 following
                 Pages
              
               .
               ]
            
             
             
               
               
               
            
          
           
             
             
               SECT
               .
               VII
               .
               
                 Of
                 the
                 Back
                 ,
                 Breast
                 ,
                 Secret
                 members
                 ,
                 Thighs
                 ,
                 Shoulders
                 ,
              
               &c.
               
            
             
               HAving
               sufficiently
               practised
               the
               Drawing
               of
               the
               several
               Limbs
               of
               Man
               and
               Woman
               ,
               as
               
                 Head
                 ,
                 Mouth
                 ,
                 Nose
                 ,
                 Hands
                 ,
                 Arms
                 ,
                 Feet
                 ,
              
               and
               Legs
               ;
               proceed
               next
               to
               the
               drawing
               of
               the
               other
               parts
               of
               the
               Bodie
               :
               as
               the
               
                 Back
                 ,
                 Belly
                 ,
                 Shoulders
                 ,
                 Breast
                 ,
                 Secrets
                 ,
              
               and
               Thighs
               ,
               therein
               following
               the
               example
               of
               this
               noble
               Master
               Palmas
               ,
               in
               the
               following
               Figure
               .
            
             
             
               
            
          
           
             
             
               SECT
               .
               VIII
               .
               
                 Of
                 whole
                 Figures
                 from
                 head
                 to
                 foot
                 .
              
            
             
               OF
               whole
               Figures
               I
               have
               furnished
               you
               with
               variety
               of
               examples
               ;
               as
               first
               ,
               of
               a
               Child
               standing
               backward
               and
               forward
               ,
               which
               is
               necessary
               to
               be
               first
               practised
               ,
               because
               these
               are
               the
               more
               easie
               ,
               being
               more
               plump
               and
               round
               then
               the
               Body
               of
               Man
               ,
               without
               that
               observation
               of
               the
               Muscles
               and
               other
               parts
               ,
               which
               I
               desire
               you
               in
               a
               methodical
               way
               to
               imitate
               often
               before
               you
               adventure
               upon
               the
               other
               Figures
               ,
               which
               are
               Man
               and
               Woman
               standing
               forward
               ,
               and
               after
               that
               Man
               and
               Woman
               standing
               backward
               ,
               as
               also
               in
               other
               postures
               :
               and
               the
               same
               order
               that
               was
               at
               first
               proposed
               about
               the
               
                 Heads
                 ,
                 Hands
              
               ,
               and
               
                 Feet
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               by
               touching
               out
               every
               Figure
               first
               with
               Charcoal
               ,
               is
               exactly
               to
               be
               observed
               in
               these
               Figures
               also
               .
            
             
             
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
          
           
             
             
               SECT
               .
               IX
               .
               
                 Rules
                 of
                 Symmetrie
                 or
                 Proportion
                 to
                 be
                 observed
                 in
                 Drawing
                 the
                 whole
                 Body
                 of
                 Man
                 or
                 Woman
                 .
              
            
             
               FOR
               your
               further
               help
               in
               Drawing
               the
               following
               Figures
               ,
               take
               notice
               of
               these
               necessary
               Rules
               :
               Begin
               at
               the
               Head
               ,
               and
               so
               proceed
               by
               degree
               ,
               as
               your
               pattern
               directs
               ;
               and
               be
               carefull
               that
               your
               parallel
               
                 Joynts
                 ,
                 Sinews
              
               ,
               or
               Muscles
               be
               directly
               opposite
               ;
               also
               that
               the
               Motion
               of
               the
               Bodie
               be
               answerable
               one
               part
               to
               another
               ,
               and
               that
               the
               parts
               and
               limbs
               of
               the
               bodie
               have
               a
               due
               symmetrie
               ;
               not
               a
               great
               Arme
               ,
               and
               a
               small
               Leg
               ;
               or
               a
               small
               Hand
               ,
               and
               a
               great
               Finger
               ,
               &c.
               
               Let
               not
               one
               part
               be
               too
               long
               for
               another
               .
               Of
               all
               which
               ,
               you
               must
               know
               ,
               that
               at
               first
               you
               will
               be
               apt
               to
               commit
               many
               errours
               ,
               but
               be
               not
               disheartned
               ;
               proceed
               ,
               and
               your
               labour
               will
               not
               be
               lost
               ,
               experience
               is
               gained
               by
               practice
               ;
               be
               but
               diligent
               ,
               and
               you
               will
               find
               more
               ease
               then
               you
               could
               imagine
               :
               at
               first
               all
               things
               that
               are
               attainable
               seem
               difficult
               ;
               we
               have
               a
               good
               old
               saying
               ,
               
                 Nothing
                 is
                 hard
                 to
                 a
                 willing
                 mind
                 ,
              
               and
               I
               can
               speak
               it
               by
               experience
               .
               I
               might
               spend
               time
               to
               tell
               you
               many
               stories
               how
               to
               proceed
               to
               Figures
               clothed
               ,
               &c.
               but
               if
               you
               can
               draw
               a
               Naked
               figure
               well
               ,
               for
               the
               order
               of
               Garments
               ,
               you
               will
               be
               able
               to
               do
               that
               with
               ease
               .
            
             
             
             
             
             
             
               And
               now
               ,
               having
               brought
               you
               thus
               far
               in
               Practice
               ,
               and
               given
               you
               a
               more
               exact
               order
               to
               proceed
               with
               so
               many
               several
               Examples
               more
               than
               larger
               Volumes
               have
               produced
               ;
               which
               you
               having
               well
               followed
               ,
               and
               attained
               to
               some
               reasonable
               measure
               of
               Proportion
               ,
               you
               may
               now
               proceed
               to
               that
               which
               may
               be
               more
               profitable
               ,
               if
               you
               first
               practice
               those
               things
               that
               may
               be
               easily
               shadowed
               with
               a
               Pen
               ,
               and
               that
               will
               fit
               your
               hand
               for
               Etching
               with
               
                 Aqua
                 fortis
              
               ,
               which
               shall
               be
               perfectly
               taught
               in
               the
               next
               Chapter
               ;
               wherein
               you
               have
               the
               mixture
               of
               the
               Ground
               to
               Etch
               upon
               ,
               the
               order
               how
               to
               prepare
               your
               Copper
               ,
               and
               how
               to
               order
               your
               
                 Aqua
                 fortis
              
               ,
               what
               Instruments
               you
               are
               to
               use
               about
               the
               same
               ,
               and
               how
               to
               take
               off
               your
               design
               on
               the
               Plate
               ;
               which
               is
               an
               experimental
               Rule
               practised
               by
               the
               best
               Etcher
               in
               England
               ,
               namely
               Mr.
               
                 W.
                 Hollar
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               X.
               
                 The
                 Proportion
                 of
                 the
                 Body
                 of
                 Man.
                 
              
            
             
               FOR
               your
               further
               information
               ,
               and
               to
               direct
               your
               judgement
               in
               Drawing
               of
               whole
               Bodies
               ,
               observe
               these
               following
               Proportions
               .
            
             
               A
               Man
               standing
               ,
               from
               the
               top
               of
               the
               Head
               to
               the
               bottom
               of
               the
               Feet
               ,
               is
               eight
               times
               the
               length
               of
               the
               Head.
               
            
             
               The
               Arme
               hanging
               straight
               down
               ,
               it
               reacheth
               within
               a
               span
               of
               the
               Knee
               .
            
             
               A
               Hand
               must
               be
               the
               length
               of
               the
               Face
               ,
               the
               Hand
               spread
               abroad
               must
               cover
               the
               Face
               ,
               and
               no
               more
               .
            
             
               Note
               ,
               that
               in
               Drawing
               a
               Figure
               standing
               ,
               you
               
               must
               first
               draw
               that
               Leg
               which
               the
               Body
               stands
               firmest
               upon
               ;
               otherwise
               your
               Figure
               will
               yield
               one
               way
               or
               other
               ,
               as
               it
               were
               falling
               .
            
             
               A
               Mans
               Armes
               extended
               is
               the
               just
               length
               of
               the
               whole
               Body
               .
            
             
               The
               like
               proportion
               is
               observed
               for
               Women
               ,
               and
               therefore
               one
               example
               serves
               for
               both
               .
            
             
               The
               Proportion
               of
               a
               Child
               ,
               according
               to
               our
               learned
               Author
               Lomantius
               ,
               consists
               of
               five
               lengths
               of
               the
               Head
               ;
               according
               to
               the
               Figure
               express'd
               in
               our
               Discourse
               ,
               for
               an
               example
               to
               the
               Practitioner
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             VI.
             
          
           
             Of
             Shadowing
             ,
             and
             Rules
             to
             be
             observed
             therein
             .
          
           
             THE
             out-lines
             of
             any
             Draught
             or
             Picture
             give
             the
             Symmetrie
             or
             Proportion
             ,
             which
             is
             enough
             to
             a
             good
             judgement
             :
             So
             the
             Figures
             before
             in
             this
             Book
             have
             only
             the
             out-lines
             ,
             and
             those
             are
             best
             to
             practise
             first
             by
             :
             I
             say
             ,
             the
             Out-lines
             shew
             the
             Proportion
             to
             a
             good
             judgement
             ;
             but
             the
             Lines
             and
             Shadows
             give
             the
             lively
             likeness
             .
             In
             Shadowing
             therefore
             of
             any
             Picture
             you
             must
             observe
             these
             Rules
             following
             .
          
           
             
               RVLE
               I.
               
            
             Cast
             your
             Shadows
             alwayes
             one
             way
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             on
             which
             side
             you
             begin
             to
             shadow
             your
             Figure
             ,
             either
             on
             the
             right
             or
             left
             side
             ,
             you
             must
             continue
             so
             doing
             through
             your
             whole
             work
             .
             As
             in
             the
             figure
             of
             a
             Man
             ,
             if
             you
             begin
             to
             shadow
             his
             left
             
             Cheek
             ,
             you
             must
             shadow
             the
             left
             side
             of
             his
             Neck
             ,
             the
             left
             side
             of
             his
             Armes
             ,
             the
             left
             side
             of
             his
             Bodie
             ,
             the
             left
             side
             of
             his
             Legs
             ,
             &c.
             
             Except
             the
             light
             side
             of
             the
             Figure
             be
             darkned
             by
             the
             opposition
             of
             some
             other
             body
             standing
             between
             the
             light
             and
             it
             .
             As
             if
             three
             Men
             were
             standing
             together
             ,
             that
             Figure
             which
             stands
             in
             the
             middle
             must
             be
             darkned
             by
             the
             foremost
             ,
             except
             the
             light
             come
             between
             them
             .
          
           
             
               RVLE
               II.
               
            
             All
             Shadows
             must
             grow
             fainter
             and
             fainter
             ,
             as
             they
             are
             farther
             removed
             from
             the
             opacous
             body
             from
             whence
             they
             issue
             .
          
           
             
               RVLE
               III.
               
            
             In
             great
             Windes
             ,
             where
             Clouds
             are
             driven
             to
             and
             fro
             several
             wayes
             ;
             as
             also
             in
             Tempest
             at
             Sea
             ,
             where
             Wave
             opposeth
             Wave
             ;
             here
             contrary
             shadows
             must
             concur
             ,
             as
             striving
             for
             superiority
             :
             here
             in
             such
             cases
             you
             must
             be
             sure
             to
             supply
             the
             greatest
             first
             ,
             and
             from
             them
             ,
             according
             to
             your
             judgement
             ,
             supply
             the
             lesser
             ;
             practice
             and
             imitation
             of
             good
             Copies
             will
             be
             your
             best
             director
             .
          
           
             
               RVLE
               IV.
               
            
             All
             Circular
             bodies
             must
             have
             a
             Circular
             shadow
             ,
             as
             they
             have
             a
             Circular
             form
             ,
             and
             as
             the
             object
             of
             light
             which
             causeth
             shadow
             is
             Circular
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             VII
             .
          
           
             Of
             Drapery
             ,
             and
             Rules
             to
             be
             observed
             therein
             .
          
           
             AS
             in
             Naked
             figures
             you
             draw
             the
             Out-lines
             first
             ,
             the
             like
             you
             must
             do
             in
             Drapery
             ,
             leaving
             room
             within
             for
             your
             greater
             and
             lesser
             folds
             ;
             then
             draw
             first
             your
             greater
             folds
             ,
             and
             then
             break
             your
             greater
             folds
             into
             lesser
             contained
             within
             them
             :
             the
             closer
             the
             Garment
             sits
             to
             the
             bodie
             ,
             the
             smaller
             and
             narrower
             must
             the
             folds
             be
             .
             Shadow
             your
             folds
             according
             to
             the
             directions
             of
             the
             last
             Chapter
             ;
             the
             innermost
             harder
             ,
             and
             the
             outer
             more
             softer
             .
             As
             in
             Shadowing
             ,
             so
             in
             Drapery
             ,
             good
             copies
             of
             Prints
             instruct
             best
             ;
             yet
             take
             these
             general
             Rules
             following
             .
          
           
             
               RVLE
               I.
               
            
             Continue
             your
             great
             folds
             throughout
             your
             Garment
             ,
             and
             break
             off
             your
             shorter
             at
             pleasure
             .
          
           
             
               RVLE
               II.
               
            
             The
             finer
             your
             Drapery
             is
             ,
             the
             fuller
             and
             sharper
             must
             your
             folds
             be
             ,
             and
             the
             shadows
             the
             stronger
             ,
             but
             yet
             sweet
             .
          
           
             
               RVLE
               III.
               
            
             That
             part
             of
             any
             Garment
             that
             sits
             close
             to
             the
             body
             ,
             as
             the
             Doublet
             of
             a
             Man
             ,
             the
             Breasts
             of
             a
             Woman
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             ,
             you
             must
             not
             fold
             at
             all
             ;
             but
             rather
             with
             your
             sweet
             shadow
             represent
             the
             part
             of
             the
             bodie
             that
             lies
             under
             the
             Garment
             ,
             as
             a
             Womans
             Breast
             ;
             with
             a
             sweet
             round
             shadow
             ,
             &c.
             
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             VIII
             .
          
           
             Of
             Landskip
             ,
             and
             Rules
             to
             be
             observed
             therein
             .
          
           
             LAndskip
             is
             that
             which
             expresseth
             in
             Picture
             whatsoever
             may
             be
             beheld
             upon
             the
             Earth
             ,
             within
             the
             species
             of
             Sight
             ;
             which
             is
             the
             termination
             of
             a
             fair
             Horizon
             ,
             representing
             Towns
             ,
             Villages
             ,
             Castles
             ,
             Promontaries
             ,
             Mountains
             ,
             Rocks
             ,
             Vallies
             ,
             Ruines
             ,
             Rivers
             ,
             and
             whatsoever
             else
             the
             eye
             is
             capable
             of
             beholding
             within
             the
             species
             of
             the
             Sight
             .
             To
             express
             which
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             all
             things
             appear
             in
             Draught
             or
             Picture
             according
             to
             true
             proportion
             and
             distance
             ,
             there
             are
             several
             Rules
             to
             be
             observed
             ,
             of
             which
             take
             these
             few
             following
             .
          
           
             
               RVLE
               I.
               
            
             In
             every
             Landskip
             shew
             a
             fair
             Horizon
             ,
             the
             Sky
             either
             clear
             or
             overcast
             with
             Clouds
             ,
             expressing
             the
             rising
             or
             setting
             of
             the
             Sun
             to
             issue
             (
             as
             it
             were
             )
             from
             or
             over
             some
             Hill
             ,
             or
             Mountain
             ,
             or
             Rock
             ;
             the
             Moon
             or
             Stars
             are
             never
             to
             be
             expressed
             in
             a
             fair
             Landskip
             ,
             but
             in
             a
             Night-piece
             ,
             I
             have
             often
             seen
             it
             ,
             as
             in
             a
             piece
             of
             our
             Sarinus
             being
             taken
             by
             night
             ,
             and
             in
             others
             .
             As
             an
             Astronomer
             with
             his
             Quadrant
             taking
             the
             height
             of
             the
             Moon
             ,
             and
             another
             with
             his
             Cross
             staff
             taking
             the
             distance
             of
             certain
             Stars
             ,
             their
             Man
             standing
             at
             a
             distance
             with
             his
             Dark-lanthorn
             ,
             to
             see
             their
             Degrees
             when
             they
             had
             made
             their
             observation
             ;
             these
             things
             ,
             as
             taking
             of
             the
             Partridge
             with
             the
             Loo-bell
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             ,
             become
             Night
             pieces
             very
             well
             .
          
           
           
             
               RVLE
               II.
               
            
             If
             you
             express
             the
             Light
             of
             the
             Sun
             in
             any
             Landskip
             ,
             be
             sure
             that
             through
             your
             whole
             work
             you
             cast
             the
             light
             of
             your
             Trees
             ,
             Buildings
             ,
             Rocks
             ,
             Ruines
             ,
             and
             all
             things
             else
             expressed
             within
             the
             verge
             thereof
             thitherwards
             .
          
           
             
               RVLE
               III.
               
            
             Be
             sure
             in
             Landskip
             that
             you
             lessen
             your
             bodies
             proportionably
             according
             to
             their
             distances
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             farther
             the
             Landskip
             goeth
             from
             your
             eye
             ,
             the
             fainter
             you
             must
             express
             any
             thing
             seen
             at
             distance
             ,
             till
             at
             last
             the
             Sky
             and
             the
             Earth
             seem
             to
             meet
             ,
             as
             the
             Colours
             in
             a
             Rainbow
             do
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             many
             excellent
             pieces
             of
             Landskip
             to
             be
             procured
             very
             easily
             ;
             as
             also
             of
             Landskip
             and
             Perspective
             intermixed
             ,
             which
             pieces
             to
             me
             were
             ever
             the
             most
             delightfull
             of
             any
             other
             ;
             and
             such
             I
             would
             advise
             you
             to
             practise
             by
             ;
             they
             ,
             if
             they
             be
             good
             ,
             being
             the
             only
             helps
             to
             teach
             you
             proportion
             of
             Bodies
             in
             any
             position
             ,
             either
             near
             or
             a-far
             off
             .
          
           
             I
             might
             here
             speak
             further
             of
             
               Damasking
               ,
               Antique
               ,
               ●risco
               ,
               Grotesco
               ,
               Tracery
               ,
            
             and
             the
             like
             ;
             but
             these
             are
             things
             that
             when
             you
             are
             expert
             in
             good
             Draught
             ,
             as
             (
             by
             diligent
             practice
             and
             following
             the
             Rules
             and
             Examples
             before
             delivered
             ,
             )
             I
             hope
             (
             by
             this
             time
             )
             you
             are
             ,
             these
             things
             will
             come
             of
             themselves
             ,
             and
             indeed
             ,
             no
             sooner
             heard
             of
             or
             seen
             ,
             but
             done
             .
             And
             thus
             I
             conclude
             this
             first
             book
             of
             Drawing
             with
             the
             Pen
             and
             Pastils
             ,
             and
             shall
             now
             proceed
             to
             the
             second
             Book
             ,
             which
             teacheth
             the
             Art
             of
             
               Etching
               and
               Graving
            
          
        
      
       
         
         
           OF
           ETCHING
           and
           GRAVING
           .
           The
           Second
           Book
           .
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             I.
             
          
           
             Of
             Etching
             with
             
               Aqua
               fortis
            
             .
          
           
             THere
             are
             several
             wayes
             for
             Etching
             ,
             and
             several
             Grounds
             of
             divers
             colours
             ,
             used
             by
             several
             men
             ,
             I
             shall
             deliver
             here
             onely
             one
             ,
             and
             that
             so
             familiar
             ,
             easie
             ,
             and
             true
             ,
             that
             I
             believe
             there
             is
             not
             a
             better
             Ground
             ,
             nor
             a
             more
             accurate
             way
             performing
             the
             work
             intended
             ,
             than
             that
             which
             shall
             be
             here
             taught
             ;
             it
             being
             the
             only
             way
             ,
             so
             many
             years
             practised
             ,
             and
             to
             this
             day
             continued
             by
             that
             unparallel'd
             designer
             and
             incomparable
             Etcher
             in
             
               Aqua
               fortis
            
             ,
             Mr.
             Hollar
             ;
             the
             manner
             of
             performing
             the
             whole
             work
             is
             as
             followeth
             .
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               I.
               
                 To
                 make
                 Mr.
              
               Hollar's
               
                 Ground
                 ,
                 and
                 how
                 to
                 Etch
                 in
                 Copper
                 ,
                 and
                 what
                 Instruments
                 ought
                 to
                 be
                 used
                 in
                 the
                 practice
                 thereof
                 .
              
            
             
               TAke
               three
               parts
               of
               
                 Virgins
                 wax
              
               ,
               one
               part
               of
               Asphaltum
               ,
               one
               part
               of
               the
               best
               Mastick
               ;
               if
               
               you
               will
               ,
               you
               may
               take
               away
               a
               third
               part
               of
               the
               Asphaltum
               ,
               and
               put
               instead
               thereof
               as
               much
               refined
               Rosin
               that
               is
               transparent
               and
               clear
               ,
               for
               this
               will
               be
               better
               to
               see
               through
               the
               Ground
               ,
               to
               stop
               up
               what
               you
               have
               occasion
               for
               .
               Beat
               your
               Asphaltum
               and
               Rosin
               together
               to
               powder
               ,
               and
               put
               your
               Wax
               into
               a
               clean
               Pipkin
               that
               hath
               never
               been
               used
               before
               ,
               and
               set
               it
               over
               a
               gentle
               fire
               ,
               and
               let
               it
               boyl
               ;
               then
               pour
               in
               the
               Asphaltum
               and
               Rosin
               into
               it
               ,
               and
               mingle
               them
               all
               together
               .
               Then
               take
               a
               Porenger
               or
               such
               like
               thing
               full
               of
               clean
               water
               ,
               and
               pour
               that
               boyling
               stuff
               when
               all
               is
               melted
               into
               the
               water
               ,
               but
               pour
               not
               out
               the
               dregs
               ,
               then
               when
               it
               is
               cold
               work
               it
               up
               into
               a
               coal
               or
               ball
               ;
               and
               when
               you
               are
               to
               use
               it
               ,
               then
               take
               a
               clean
               rag
               and
               double
               it
               ,
               that
               no
               dregs
               or
               knots
               may
               come
               through
               the
               rag
               ,
               and
               tie
               it
               fast
               with
               a
               piece
               of
               thread
               ;
               so
               is
               your
               Ground
               prepared
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               II.
               
                 How
                 to
                 prepare
                 your
                 Copper
              
               .
            
             
               YOur
               Copper
               must
               be
               well
               planisht
               ,
               that
               it
               may
               lie
               level
               ;
               and
               before
               you
               lay
               on
               the
               Ground
               ,
               take
               your
               Plate
               ,
               and
               with
               a
               Charcoal
               well
               burnt
               coal
               it
               over
               with
               very
               clean
               water
               ;
               then
               wash
               it
               off
               with
               clean
               water
               never
               used
               before
               ,
               and
               set
               it
               sloping
               to
               run
               off
               ;
               when
               it
               is
               dry
               ,
               then
               scrape
               some
               Chalk
               fine
               all
               over
               it
               ,
               and
               with
               a
               very
               clean
               fine
               rag
               rub
               it
               over
               ;
               but
               let
               not
               your
               fingers
               touch
               upon
               the
               Plate
               ,
               till
               you
               have
               put
               the
               Ground
               on
               ,
               which
               you
               must
               lay
               on
               thus
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               SECT
               .
               III.
               
                 How
                 to
                 lay
                 the
                 Ground
                 upon
                 the
                 Plate
                 .
              
            
             
               PUt
               into
               some
               fire-pan
               some
               small-coal
               or
               coal-fire
               ,
               for
               charcoal
               is
               too
               hot
               ,
               then
               lay
               down
               the
               Copper
               over
               that
               ,
               so
               as
               the
               fire
               may
               have
               air
               ;
               then
               take
               your
               Ground
               ,
               it
               being
               in
               a
               cloth
               as
               a
               foresaid
               ,
               and
               rub
               up
               and
               down
               the
               Copper
               ,
               so
               as
               it
               sufficiently
               may
               cover
               the
               Plate
               ,
               not
               too
               thin
               nor
               too
               thick
               ;
               then
               take
               a
               Ducks
               feather
               of
               the
               wing
               and
               smooth
               it
               as
               well
               as
               possibly
               you
               can
               all
               one
               way
               ,
               and
               then
               cross
               and
               cross
               until
               it
               lie
               well
               to
               your
               eye
               ;
               but
               take
               heed
               that
               your
               Copper
               be
               not
               too
               hot
               ,
               for
               if
               it
               lie
               until
               the
               Ground
               smoak
               all
               the
               moisture
               of
               the
               Ground
               is
               burnt
               away
               ,
               and
               that
               will
               spoil
               your
               piece
               in
               Etching
               ,
               because
               the
               Ground
               will
               break
               or
               fly
               up
               ;
               this
               done
               ,
               let
               your
               Plate
               be
               cold
               ,
               then
               grind
               some
               White-lead
               with
               Gum-water
               ,
               and
               note
               ,
               that
               as
               much
               Gum
               as
               the
               bigness
               of
               a
               Cherry-stone
               will
               serve
               for
               a
               piece
               of
               White-lead
               as
               big
               as
               a
               Nutmeg
               ;
               but
               you
               must
               understand
               ,
               that
               you
               must
               put
               so
               much
               water
               that
               the
               white
               may
               be
               of
               convenient
               thickness
               to
               spread
               on
               the
               Copper
               .
            
             
               Then
               you
               must
               have
               a
               large
               Pencil
               or
               small
               Brush
               ,
               as
               the
               Painters
               use
               ,
               of
               the
               bigness
               of
               a
               Walnut
               ,
               or
               more
               especially
               for
               a
               large
               Plate
               ,
               and
               with
               that
               strike
               over
               the
               Plate
               cross
               twice
               or
               thrice
               ,
               till
               you
               see
               it
               smooth
               .
            
             
               Then
               you
               must
               have
               another
               Brush
               larger
               then
               the
               first
               ,
               but
               very
               smooth
               ,
               made
               of
               several
               Squirels
               tails
               ,
               with
               that
               you
               may
               smooth
               gently
               the
               White
               ,
               
               which
               you
               could
               not
               do
               with
               the
               other
               Brush
               ,
               and
               then
               let
               it
               lie
               till
               it
               be
               dry
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               IV.
               
                 How
                 to
                 transfer
                 your
                 design
                 upon
                 the
                 Copper
                 .
              
            
             
               THen
               take
               your
               design
               or
               Copie
               after
               which
               you
               are
               to
               work
               ,
               scrape
               on
               the
               back-side
               thereof
               some
               red
               Chalk
               all
               over
               ,
               then
               go
               over
               that
               by
               scraping
               some
               soft
               small-coal
               till
               it
               mingle
               with
               the
               chalk
               ,
               then
               take
               a
               Hand-brush
               or
               great
               Pencil
               that
               is
               very
               stiff
               ,
               and
               rub
               it
               up
               and
               down
               till
               it
               be
               fine
               and
               even
               ,
               and
               so
               lay
               down
               the
               design
               on
               your
               Plate
               ,
               and
               with
               a
               blunt
               Needle
               or
               Point
               draw
               over
               the
               out-stroke
               ;
               you
               must
               have
               several
               Needles
               ,
               some
               bigger
               ,
               and
               some
               finer
               ,
               put
               them
               into
               a
               pencil-stick
               of
               the
               length
               of
               a
               writing-pen
               ,
               and
               on
               the
               other
               end
               keep
               one
               Pencil
               to
               wipe
               away
               the
               Ground
               that
               your
               Needle
               fetches
               off
               when
               you
               work
               .
               To
               blunt
               your
               Needle
               point
               you
               must
               do
               thus
               ,
               blunt
               it
               on
               a
               Table
               ,
               or
               on
               the
               back-side
               of
               a
               Copper
               plate
               ,
               still
               holding
               the
               point
               downward
               ,
               and
               carry
               your
               hand
               circular
               that
               you
               keep
               the
               point
               round
               ;
               the
               finest
               Needles
               you
               must
               sharpen
               upon
               a
               fine
               Whet-stone
               ,
               and
               still
               turning
               it
               betwixt
               your
               fingers
               as
               you
               whet
               it
               ,
               as
               the
               Turners
               do
               their
               work
               ,
               to
               keep
               it
               round
               ,
               then
               after
               smooth
               it
               upon
               a
               Table-book
               leaf
               ;
               and
               as
               you
               work
               you
               need
               not
               scratch
               hard
               into
               the
               Copper
               ,
               only
               so
               as
               you
               may
               see
               the
               Needle
               go
               through
               the
               Ground
               to
               the
               Copper
               ,
               and
               alwayes
               when
               you
               leave
               your
               work
               wrap
               your
               Plate
               up
               in
               paper
               ,
               lest
               
               your
               Plate
               get
               scratches
               ,
               which
               it
               will
               be
               apt
               to
               do
               ,
               and
               the
               Ground
               will
               be
               apt
               to
               be
               corrupted
               lying
               open
               in
               the
               air
               ,
               and
               the
               moisture
               drawn
               out
               of
               the
               Ground
               ,
               and
               the
               same
               inconveniency
               will
               accrue
               by
               letting
               your
               Ground
               lie
               too
               long
               upon
               your
               Plate
               before
               you
               finish
               ,
               three
               or
               four
               moneths
               time
               will
               eat
               out
               the
               moisture
               of
               the
               Ground
               ,
               and
               in
               Etching
               it
               will
               seem
               broad
               and
               deep
               ,
               and
               when
               you
               think
               it
               eaten
               enough
               ,
               you
               will
               find
               it
               to
               be
               eaten
               little
               or
               nothing
               :
               in
               Winter
               time
               wrap
               your
               Plate
               in
               a
               Blanket
               as
               well
               as
               Paper
               when
               you
               leave
               your
               work
               ;
               if
               the
               Copper
               get
               frost
               ,
               it
               will
               cause
               the
               Ground
               to
               rise
               up
               from
               the
               Copper
               in
               the
               eating
               with
               the
               
                 Aqua
                 fortis
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               V.
               
                 How
                 to
                 wall
                 about
                 your
                 Plate
                 about
                 with
                 Wax
                 ,
                 to
                 lay
                 on
                 your
              
               Aqua
               fortis
               ,
               
                 and
                 to
                 finish
                 your
                 work
              
               .
            
             
               YOur
               Plate
               being
               prepared
               ,
               your
               Ground
               laid
               on
               ,
               and
               your
               Design
               transferred
               upon
               your
               Plate
               ;
               when
               you
               are
               going
               to
               Etch
               ,
               then
               take
               green
               Wax
               and
               melt
               it
               in
               some
               little
               pipkin
               ,
               and
               with
               a
               Pencil
               cover
               round
               about
               the
               edges
               of
               the
               Copper
               ;
               first
               ,
               with
               the
               hot
               Wax
               stick
               it
               round
               about
               the
               Plate
               as
               a
               wall
               to
               keep
               in
               the
               
                 Aqua
                 fortis
              
               ,
               that
               it
               may
               stick
               fast
               ,
               let
               the
               same
               be
               of
               Green
               wax
               also
               ,
               which
               draw
               out
               into
               long
               pieces
               of
               the
               thickness
               of
               strong
               paste-board
               ,
               and
               as
               broad
               as
               a
               knife
               ,
               then
               fasten
               it
               about
               the
               edges
               with
               a
               little
               stick
               being
               broad
               on
               the
               end
               ,
               and
               sharp
               edged
               ,
               and
               with
               it
               
               thrust
               down
               the
               Wax
               to
               make
               it
               stick
               ,
               then
               if
               your
               work
               be
               fine
               ,
               take
               of
               
                 Aqua
                 fortis
              
               the
               third
               part
               of
               an
               ounce
               ,
               and
               break
               it
               with
               your
               other
               water
               that
               hath
               been
               used
               before
               twice
               or
               thrice
               ,
               and
               take
               at
               least
               two
               parts
               of
               the
               old
               to
               one
               part
               of
               the
               new
               .
               In
               case
               you
               have
               no
               
                 Aqua
                 fortis
              
               formerly
               used
               ,
               take
               good
               Wine-vinegar
               to
               mix
               with
               your
               
                 Aqua
                 fortis
              
               ,
               but
               if
               your
               work
               be
               course
               ,
               you
               may
               use
               your
               three
               pence
               the
               ounce
               Water
               only
               ;
               and
               for
               such
               things
               as
               you
               will
               have
               fine
               and
               sweet
               ,
               you
               must
               first
               pour
               out
               your
               
                 Aqua
                 fortis
              
               into
               some
               earthen
               dish
               ,
               then
               wash
               off
               the
               
                 Aqua
                 fortis
              
               with
               clean
               water
               ,
               and
               let
               it
               be
               dry
               ,
               then
               melt
               some
               Candle-grease
               with
               a
               little
               Ground
               ,
               and
               with
               a
               Pencil
               cover
               those
               things
               you
               will
               have
               to
               lie
               faint
               ,
               then
               pour
               on
               your
               
                 Aqua
                 fortis
              
               again
               as
               oft
               as
               you
               see
               need
               ;
               then
               melt
               your
               Ground
               the
               same
               way
               you
               laid
               it
               on
               ,
               and
               with
               a
               linnen
               rag
               wipe
               clean
               your
               Plate
               ,
               and
               so
               is
               your
               work
               finished
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             II.
             
          
           
             Of
             GRAVING
             .
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               I.
               
                 Of
                 necessary
                 Instruments
                 belonging
                 to
                 Graving
                 .
              
            
             
               HE
               that
               will
               undertake
               the
               Art
               of
               Graving
               ,
               must
               know
               how
               to
               Draw
               ,
               and
               hatch
               with
               a
               Pen
               ;
               which
               ,
               I
               doubt
               not
               ,
               but
               he
               that
               hath
               observed
               the
               former
               Rules
               can
               do
               .
            
             
               
               
                 1.
                 
                 
                   Of
                   your
                   Oyl-stone
                
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 first
                 thing
                 you
                 are
                 to
                 do
                 ,
                 is
                 to
                 provide
                 a
                 good
                 Oyl-stone
                 ,
                 which
                 you
                 may
                 have
                 of
                 those
                 that
                 sell
                 several
                 Tooles
                 for
                 the
                 Goldsmiths
                 ;
                 which
                 ,
                 let
                 be
                 very
                 smooth
                 ,
                 not
                 too
                 hard
                 nor
                 too
                 soft
                 ,
                 and
                 be
                 sure
                 it
                 be
                 without
                 pin-holes
                 .
                 Now
                 to
                 fit
                 your self
                 aright
                 ,
                 you
                 are
                 to
                 resolve
                 what
                 kind
                 of
                 Graving
                 you
                 will
                 follow
                 ;
                 if
                 you
                 follow
                 Picture
                 or
                 Letter
                 work
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 a
                 work
                 more
                 curious
                 than
                 the
                 Goldsmiths
                 :
                 Armes
                 and
                 Letters
                 are
                 upon
                 Silver
                 or
                 Pewter
                 ,
                 and
                 accordingly
                 your
                 Gravers
                 must
                 be
                 shap'd
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 2.
                 
                 
                   Of
                   Gravers
                
                 .
              
               
                 Goldsmiths
                 Gravers
                 are
                 crooked
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 may
                 more
                 readily
                 come
                 at
                 hollow
                 work
                 ,
                 but
                 for
                 Copper-pictures
                 or
                 Letters
                 the
                 best
                 Gravers
                 are
                 the
                 straight
                 ,
                 which
                 chuse
                 thus
                 ;
                 Take
                 a
                 File
                 and
                 touch
                 the
                 edge
                 of
                 the
                 Graver
                 therewith
                 ,
                 if
                 the
                 File
                 cut
                 it
                 ,
                 it
                 is
                 too
                 soft
                 and
                 will
                 never
                 do
                 you
                 good
                 ;
                 but
                 if
                 the
                 File
                 will
                 not
                 touch
                 it
                 by
                 reason
                 of
                 the
                 hardness
                 ,
                 it
                 will
                 serve
                 your
                 occasion
                 ,
                 although
                 such
                 a
                 Graver
                 be
                 apt
                 at
                 first
                 to
                 break
                 short
                 off
                 ,
                 after
                 a
                 little
                 use
                 by
                 whetting
                 it
                 will
                 come
                 to
                 a
                 good
                 temper
                 and
                 condition
                 ,
                 as
                 by
                 experience
                 I
                 have
                 found
                 ;
                 though
                 some
                 ignorant
                 of
                 what
                 they
                 have
                 writ
                 ,
                 would
                 puzzle
                 you
                 about
                 altering
                 the
                 temper
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
             
               SECT
               .
               II.
               
                 The
                 several
                 wayes
                 of
                 holding
                 the
                 Graver
                 .
              
            
             
               LEt
               the
               end
               of
               the
               haft
               of
               the
               Graver
               rest
               against
               the
               ball
               of
               the
               thumb
               ,
               and
               let
               the
               fore-finger
               guide
               the
               Graver
               ,
               which
               is
               done
               by
               resting
               steadily
               upon
               the
               point
               of
               your
               Graver
               .
            
             
               You
               must
               also
               provide
               a
               Bag
               of
               Sand
               to
               lay
               your
               Plate
               upon
               ,
               on
               which
               you
               may
               turn
               your
               Plate
               at
               ease
               every
               way
               :
               And
               note
               ,
               that
               with
               your
               left
               hand
               you
               must
               turn
               your
               Plate
               as
               the
               stroaks
               you
               grave
               do
               turn
               ,
               which
               is
               not
               easily
               attained
               without
               diligent
               care
               .
            
             
               You
               Copper
               plates
               ready
               polished
               do
               often
               come
               from
               Holland
               ,
               or
               else
               you
               may
               have
               them
               prepared
               by
               several
               in
               England
               ;
               you
               may
               be
               directed
               how
               to
               have
               these
               Plates
               by
               most
               Printers
               of
               Plates
               in
               London
               ,
               and
               therefore
               I
               forbear
               to
               trouble
               you
               or
               my self
               about
               directing
               you
               how
               to
               prepare
               Plates
               for
               your
               use
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               
            
             
               
               SECT
               .
               III.
               
                 The
                 forms
                 of
                 Graving-tools
                 ,
                 as
                 also
                 the
                 manner
                 of
                 whetting
                 your
                 Graver
                 .
              
            
             
               THe
               upper
               part
               of
               this
               figure
               will
               shew
               two
               sorts
               of
               Graving-tools
               ,
               the
               one
               formed
               square
               ,
               the
               other
               lozeng
               :
               the
               square
               Graver
               makes
               a
               broad
               and
               shallow
               stroke
               ,
               or
               hatch
               ;
               and
               the
               lozeng
               makes
               a
               deep
               and
               narrower
               stroke
               .
               The
               use
               of
               the
               square
               Graver
               is
               to
               make
               the
               largest
               strokes
               ,
               and
               the
               use
               of
               the
               other
               is
               to
               make
               the
               strokes
               more
               delicate
               and
               lively
               .
               But
               I
               preferre
               a
               Graver
               made
               of
               an
               indifferent
               size
               betwixt
               both
               these
               two
               ,
               which
               will
               make
               your
               strokes
               ,
               or
               hatches
               ,
               show
               with
               more
               life
               and
               vigour
               ,
               and
               yet
               with
               sufficient
               force
               ,
               according
               as
               you
               shall
               manage
               it
               in
               your
               working
               :
               The
               forms
               of
               which
               will
               appear
               in
               the
               1.
               and
               2.
               figures
               .
            
             
               The
               3.
               figure
               shews
               you
               how
               to
               whet
               the
               two
               sides
               of
               your
               Graver
               ,
               which
               is
               to
               be
               done
               in
               this
               manner
               following
               ;
               you
               must
               have
               a
               very
               good
               Oyl-stone
               smooth
               and
               flat
               ,
               and
               having
               powred
               a
               little
               Sallad-oyl
               thereupon
               ,
               take
               the
               Graver
               ,
               and
               laying
               one
               side
               of
               it
               (
               that
               which
               you
               intend
               shall
               cut
               the
               Copper
               )
               flat
               upon
               the
               stone
               ,
               whet
               that
               side
               very
               flat
               and
               even
               ;
               and
               to
               that
               purpose
               have
               an
               especial
               care
               to
               carry
               your
               hand
               stedfast
               ,
               and
               with
               an
               equal
               strength
               ,
               placing
               your
               fore-finger
               very
               firm
               upon
               the
               opposite
               side
               of
               your
               Graver
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               that
               you
               may
               guide
               it
               with
               the
               more
               exactness
               :
               then
               turn
               the
               very
               next
               side
               of
               your
               Graver
               ,
               and
               whet
               that
               in
               the
               like
               manner
               ,
               as
               you
               did
               the
               other
               ;
               so
               
               that
               there
               may
               be
               a
               very
               sharp
               edge
               for
               the
               space
               of
               an
               inch
               or
               better
               ;
               then
               turning
               uppermost
               that
               edge
               which
               you
               have
               so
               whetted
               ,
               and
               setting
               the
               end
               of
               your
               Graver
               obliquely
               upon
               the
               stone
               ,
               carry
               your
               hand
               exactly
               even
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               that
               it
               may
               be
               whetted
               very
               flat
               and
               sloping
               ,
               in
               the
               form
               of
               a
               lozeng
               ,
               making
               to
               the
               edge
               a
               sharp
               point
               ,
               as
               the
               figure
               4.
               shews
               you
               .
            
             
               It
               is
               very
               necessary
               that
               you
               take
               great
               care
               in
               the
               exact
               whetting
               of
               your
               Graver
               ;
               for
               it
               is
               impossible
               that
               you
               should
               ever
               work
               with
               that
               neatness
               and
               curiosity
               as
               you
               desire
               ,
               if
               your
               Graver
               be
               not
               very
               good
               ,
               and
               rightly
               whetted
               .
            
             
               I
               cannot
               demonstrate
               it
               so
               plain
               and
               fully
               by
               figures
               ,
               and
               discourse
               ,
               as
               I
               would
               :
               if
               you
               have
               acquaintance
               with
               an
               Artist
               in
               this
               way
               ,
               you
               may
               easily
               understand
               in
               a
               short
               time
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               IV.
               
                 The
                 manner
                 how
                 to
                 hold
                 and
                 handle
                 your
                 Graver
                 .
              
            
             
               THe
               uppermost
               part
               of
               this
               figure
               describes
               to
               you
               the
               form
               of
               two
               Gravers
               ,
               with
               their
               handles
               ,
               fitted
               for
               the
               whetting
               .
               They
               that
               use
               this
               Art
               ,
               do
               before
               they
               make
               use
               of
               them
               ,
               commonly
               cut
               away
               that
               part
               of
               the
               knob
               or
               bowl
               that
               is
               at
               the
               end
               of
               their
               handles
               ,
               which
               is
               upon
               the
               same
               line
               with
               the
               edge
               of
               their
               Graver
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               it
               may
               not
               hinder
               them
               in
               their
               graving
               ,
               as
               the
               figure
               2.
               shews
               you
               .
            
             
               For
               if
               you
               work
               upon
               a
               large\late
               you
               will
               find
               
               that
               part
               of
               your
               handle
               (
               if
               it
               be
               not
               cut
               away
               )
               will
               so
               rest
               upon
               the
               copper
               ,
               that
               it
               will
               hinder
               the
               smooth
               and
               even
               carriage
               of
               your
               hand
               in
               making
               your
               strokes
               or
               hatches
               ;
               also
               it
               will
               cause
               your
               Graver
               to
               run
               into
               the
               copper
               in
               such
               sort
               ,
               that
               you
               shall
               not
               be
               able
               to
               manage
               it
               at
               your
               pleasure
               .
            
             
               The
               5.
               figure
               describes
               to
               you
               the
               way
               of
               holding
               your
               Graver
               ;
               which
               is
               thus
               ,
               place
               the
               knob
               or
               ball
               of
               the
               handle
               of
               your
               Graver
               in
               the
               hollow
               of
               your
               hand
               ,
               and
               having
               extended
               your
               fore-finger
               towards
               the
               point
               of
               your
               Graver
               ,
               laying
               it
               opposite
               to
               the
               edge
               that
               should
               cut
               the
               copper
               ,
               place
               your
               other
               fingers
               on
               the
               side
               of
               your
               handle
               ,
               and
               your
               thumb
               on
               the
               other
               side
               of
               the
               Graver
               ,
               in
               such
               sort
               that
               you
               may
               guide
               your
               Graver
               flat
               and
               parallel
               with
               the
               plate
               ;
               as
               you
               may
               see
               in
               the
               figure
               .
            
             
               And
               be
               very
               carefull
               that
               your
               fingers
               do
               not
               interpose
               between
               the
               plate
               and
               the
               Graver
               ,
               for
               that
               will
               hinder
               you
               in
               carrying
               your
               Graver
               level
               with
               the
               plate
               ,
               so
               that
               you
               cannot
               make
               your
               strokes
               with
               that
               freedom
               and
               neatness
               ,
               which
               otherwise
               you
               may
               .
               This
               I
               think
               fit
               to
               give
               you
               notice
               of
               ,
               because
               the
               skill
               of
               holding
               your
               Graver
               is
               that
               which
               you
               must
               first
               perfectly
               learn.
               
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               V.
               
                 The
                 manner
                 of
                 holding
                 your
                 hand
                 in
                 Graving
                 .
              
            
             
               HAving
               described
               the
               way
               of
               holding
               your
               Graver
               ,
               the
               next
               thing
               is
               to
               shew
               you
               how
               to
               guide
               your
               Graver
               upon
               the
               plate
               in
               making
               of
               your
               
               strokes
               ,
               which
               are
               straight
               or
               crooked
               ;
               that
               you
               may
               work
               with
               the
               more
               ease
               and
               convenience
               ,
               you
               must
               have
               a
               strong
               round
               leather
               Cushion
               fill'd
               with
               sand
               or
               fine
               dust
               ;
               let
               it
               be
               made
               about
               half
               a
               foot
               broad
               in
               the
               diameter
               ,
               and
               three
               or
               four
               inches
               deep
               ;
               lay
               this
               upon
               a
               table
               which
               standeth
               fast
               and
               firm
               :
               then
               lay
               your
               plate
               upon
               the
               cushion
               ,
               as
               is
               described
               in
               the
               6.
               figure
               .
            
             
               When
               you
               are
               to
               make
               any
               straight
               strokes
               ,
               hold
               your
               Graver
               as
               is
               directed
               in
               the
               former
               Section
               ;
               and
               if
               you
               will
               have
               your
               strokes
               deeper
               or
               broader
               in
               one
               place
               than
               in
               another
               ,
               in
               that
               place
               where
               you
               would
               have
               them
               deepest
               you
               must
               press
               your
               hand
               hardest
               ;
               but
               especially
               in
               making
               of
               a
               straight
               stroke
               ,
               be
               carefull
               to
               hold
               your
               plate
               firm
               and
               stedfast
               upon
               the
               cushion
               .
            
             
               And
               if
               you
               make
               any
               crooked
               or
               winding
               strokes
               ,
               then
               hold
               your
               hand
               and
               Graver
               stedfast
               ;
               and
               as
               you
               work
               turn
               your
               plate
               against
               your
               Graver
               ;
               for
               otherwise
               it
               is
               impossible
               for
               you
               to
               make
               any
               crooked
               or
               winding
               stroke
               with
               that
               neatness
               and
               command
               ,
               which
               by
               this
               means
               you
               may
               ,
               if
               you
               do
               not
               move
               your
               plate
               ,
               and
               keep
               your
               arm
               and
               elbow
               fixed
               or
               rested
               upon
               the
               table
               .
            
             
               If
               as
               you
               are
               working
               your
               Graver
               happen
               to
               break
               often
               on
               the
               point
               ,
               it
               is
               a
               sign
               it
               is
               tempered
               too
               hard
               ;
               to
               help
               this
               take
               a
               red
               hot
               charcoal
               ,
               and
               lay
               the
               end
               of
               your
               Graver
               upon
               it
               ,
               and
               when
               you
               perceive
               your
               Graver
               to
               wax
               yellowish
               ,
               dip
               it
               in
               the
               water
               :
               If
               your
               Graver
               become
               blunt
               without
               breaking
               ,
               it
               is
               a
               sign
               it
               is
               nothing
               worth
               .
            
             
               After
               you
               have
               graved
               part
               of
               your
               work
               ,
               it
               will
               
               be
               necessary
               to
               scrape
               it
               with
               the
               sharp
               edge
               of
               a
               Burnisher
               ,
               carrying
               it
               along
               even
               with
               the
               plate
               ,
               to
               take
               off
               the
               roughness
               of
               the
               strokes
               ;
               but
               in
               so
               doing
               take
               heed
               of
               making
               any
               scratches
               in
               your
               work
               .
            
             
               To
               the
               end
               you
               may
               better
               see
               that
               which
               is
               graven
               ,
               they
               commonly
               roll
               up
               close
               a
               piece
               of
               a
               black
               Felt
               or
               Castor
               ,
               liquored
               over
               with
               a
               little
               Oyl
               ,
               and
               therewith
               rub
               the
               places
               graven
               :
               And
               if
               you
               perceive
               any
               scratches
               in
               your
               plate
               ,
               rub
               them
               out
               with
               your
               Burnisher
               :
               and
               if
               you
               have
               graved
               any
               of
               your
               strokes
               too
               deep
               ,
               you
               make
               them
               appear
               fainter
               with
               rubbing
               them
               with
               your
               Burnisher
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               VI.
               
                 How
                 to
                 take
                 off
                 any
                 Picture
                 ,
                 or
                 Map-letters
                 ,
              
               &c.
               
                 upon
                 your
                 Copper
              
               .
            
             
               TAke
               your
               Plate
               and
               heat
               it
               over
               the
               fire
               ,
               and
               having
               a
               piece
               of
               yellow
               Bees
               wax
               ,
               put
               into
               ,
               and
               tyed
               up
               in
               a
               fine
               Holland
               rag
               ,
               try
               if
               your
               Plate
               be
               hot
               enough
               to
               melt
               your
               Wax
               ,
               if
               it
               be
               ,
               lightly
               wipe
               over
               your
               plate
               with
               that
               wax
               ,
               until
               you
               see
               it
               be
               covered
               over
               with
               wax
               ,
               but
               let
               it
               be
               but
               thin
               ;
               if
               it
               be
               not
               even
               ,
               after
               it
               is
               cold
               you
               may
               heat
               it
               again
               ,
               and
               with
               a
               feather
               lay
               it
               even
               ,
               which
               at
               first
               you
               will
               find
               a
               little
               difficult
               .
            
             
               Now
               if
               wh●t
               you
               are
               to
               imitate
               be
               an
               exact
               copy
               ,
               you
               must
               note
               it
               must
               stand
               the
               contrary
               way
               in
               the
               plate
               ,
               and
               therefore
               your
               best
               way
               will
               be
               to
               track
               it
               over
               in
               every
               limb
               with
               a
               good
               Black-lead
               Pencil
               ,
               especially
               if
               it
               be
               an
               old
               picture
               ,
               which
               having
               done
               ,
               take
               an
               old
               Ivory
               haft
               of
               a
               knife
               ,
               and
               placing
               your
               
               picture
               exactly
               on
               your
               copper
               ,
               the
               face
               downward
               ,
               take
               your
               haft
               and
               lightly
               rub
               over
               your
               print
               ,
               and
               you
               shall
               perceive
               the
               perfect
               proportion
               remain
               upon
               the
               wax
               that
               is
               upon
               the
               plate
               ;
               then
               take
               a
               long
               Graver
               ,
               or
               another
               piece
               of
               steel
               grownd
               sharp
               ,
               and
               with
               the
               point
               thereof
               go
               over
               every
               particular
               limb
               in
               the
               out-stroke
               ,
               and
               there
               will
               be
               no
               difficulty
               to
               mark
               out
               all
               the
               shadows
               as
               you
               go
               to
               engrave
               your
               work
               ,
               having
               the
               proportion
               before
               you
               .
            
             
               And
               it
               will
               be
               more
               ready
               ,
               if
               also
               you
               note
               your
               shadows
               how
               far
               they
               be
               dark
               ,
               and
               how
               far
               light
               with
               your
               black-lead
               ,
               before
               you
               rub
               it
               off
               ;
               but
               a
               learner
               may
               be
               puzzeled
               at
               first
               with
               too
               many
               observations
               .
            
             
               At
               first
               you
               will
               find
               some
               difficulty
               for
               carrying
               your
               hand
               ,
               and
               for
               the
               depth
               of
               your
               stroke
               you
               are
               to
               engrave
               ;
               but
               take
               this
               experiment
               in
               your
               first
               beginning
               ;
               learn
               to
               carry
               your
               hand
               with
               such
               a
               slight
               ,
               that
               you
               may
               end
               your
               stroke
               with
               as
               light
               a
               stroke
               as
               you
               began
               it
               ,
               and
               though
               you
               may
               have
               occasion
               to
               have
               one
               part
               deeper
               or
               blacker
               than
               another
               ,
               do
               that
               by
               degrees
               ;
               and
               that
               you
               may
               the
               more
               distinctly
               do
               it
               ,
               observe
               your
               strokes
               that
               they
               be
               not
               too
               close
               nor
               too
               wide
               :
               and
               for
               your
               more
               exact
               observation
               ,
               practice
               by
               those
               prints
               that
               are
               more
               loosly
               shadowed
               at
               first
               ,
               left
               by
               imitating
               those
               dark
               and
               more
               shadowed
               ,
               you
               be
               at
               a
               loss
               where
               to
               begin
               or
               where
               to
               end
               ;
               which
               to
               know
               ,
               is
               only
               got
               by
               practice
               :
               Thus
               for
               Pictures
               .
            
             
               Now
               for
               Letters
               ,
               if
               copies
               ,
               every
               word
               and
               letter
               must
               be
               either
               writ
               with
               ungumm'd
               Ink
               ,
               or
               else
               gone
               over
               with
               Black-lead
               ,
               and
               rubb'd
               on
               the
               
               plate
               when
               it
               is
               waxed
               ,
               as
               before
               ;
               but
               if
               a
               Map
               or
               other
               Mathematical
               Instrument
               ,
               every
               circle
               ,
               square
               ,
               or
               perpendicular
               must
               be
               drawn
               over
               as
               before
               ,
               or
               else
               you
               cannot
               exactly
               imitate
               the
               same
               ;
               but
               if
               you
               be
               to
               cut
               any
               Face
               ,
               Armes
               ,
               Instruments
               ,
               or
               Map
               not
               to
               be
               printed
               ,
               then
               if
               you
               black
               over
               the
               back-side
               ,
               as
               you
               are
               directed
               for
               your
               design
               in
               Etching
               ,
               that
               will
               serve
               your
               turn
               ;
               onely
               for
               Etching
               you
               use
               a
               mixt
               ground
               ,
               and
               for
               to
               Engrave
               you
               onely
               use
               wax
               .
            
             
               And
               thus
               ,
               in
               a
               plain
               style
               ,
               I
               have
               given
               you
               an
               account
               of
               the
               whole
               mysterie
               of
               Engraving
               .
            
          
        
      
       
         
         
           OF
           LIMNING
           IN
           WATER-COLOURS
           .
           The
           Third
           Book
           .
        
         
           THE
           pr●ctice
           of
           Limning
           is
           a
           quality
           commendable
           in
           any
           person
           ,
           and
           a
           p●actice
           meet
           for
           the
           Noblest
           personage
           of
           what
           quality
           soever
           ;
           I
           shall
           say
           no
           more
           in
           the
           praise
           of
           it
           ,
           it
           may
           speak
           for
           it self
           ,
           but
           come
           immediately
           to
           shew
           you
           the
           manner
           how
           to
           perform
           it
           ;
           therein
           fol●owing
           the
           Rules
           now
           practised
           by
           the
           most
           eminent
           Masters
           in
           that
           faculty
           :
           and
           first
           ,
           I
           shall
           begin
           in
           this
           as
           in
           the
           other
           parts
           of
           this
           Book
           ,
           what
           things
           are
           to
           be
           in
           a
           readiness
           prepared
           for
           the
           practice
           of
           it
           .
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             I.
             
          
           
             Of
             necessaries
             belonging
             to
             Limning
             .
          
           
             TO
             the
             Limning
             in
             Water-colours
             th●re
             belongs
             sever●l
             thing
             ,
             as
             Gumms
             of
             several
             sorts
             ,
             and
             Waters
             made
             of
             them
             ,
             a
             Grinding-stone
             
             and
             Muller
             ,
             several
             
               Colours
               ,
               Liquid
               Gold
            
             and
             Silver
             ,
             several
             Sizes
             to
             lay
             Gold
             ,
             Parchment
             of
             the
             finest
             ,
             as
             of
             
               Abortive
               Skins
               ,
               Pencils
            
             of
             divers
             sorts
             ;
             of
             the
             making
             and
             preparing
             all
             these
             in
             their
             order
             ,
             and
             then
             to
             their
             use
             .
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               I.
               
                 Of
                 Gumms
                 and
                 Gum-waters
                 used
                 in
                 Limning
                 .
              
            
             
               THe
               principal
               Gum
               is
               Gum-Arabick
               ,
               get
               the
               best
               that
               may
               be
               ,
               which
               you
               shall
               know
               by
               the
               whiteness
               and
               clearness
               ;
               if
               it
               be
               yellowish
               ,
               of
               an
               Amber
               colour
               ,
               it
               is
               naught
               .
            
             
               To
               make
               Gum-water
               hereof
               ,
               do
               thus
               ,
               take
               a
               cle●n
               earthen
               Vessel
               ,
               Pan
               ,
               Dish
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               ,
               put
               therein
               the
               fairest
               Spring-water
               you
               can
               procu●e
               ,
               then
               take
               a
               quantity
               of
               Gum
               -
               Arabick
               ,
               and
               tie
               it
               in
               a
               fine
               clean
               Linnen
               cloth
               ,
               as
               in
               a
               bag
               ,
               and
               hang
               this
               in
               the
               middle
               of
               the
               water
               ,
               and
               there
               let
               it
               rest
               till
               the
               Gum
               be
               dissolved
               ;
               if
               you
               find
               your
               water
               be
               not
               stiff
               enough
               of
               the
               Gum
               ,
               put
               more
               Gum
               into
               your
               cloth
               ,
               and
               let
               that
               dissolve
               as
               the
               other
               did
               ;
               if
               it
               be
               too
               stiff
               ,
               add
               more
               Water
               :
               of
               this
               Gum-water
               it
               is
               absolutely
               necessary
               you
               have
               alwayes
               by
               you
               tow
               sorts
               ,
               one
               strong
               ,
               the
               other
               weak
               ;
               and
               of
               these
               two
               ,
               you
               may
               make
               a
               third
               at
               pleasure
               ;
               preserve
               these
               in
               clean
               Glasses
               for
               your
               use
               .
            
             
               
                 Of
                 GVM-LAKE
                 .
              
               
                 Gum-Lake
                 is
                 a
                 compounded
                 Gum
                 made
                 of
                 many
                 ingredients
                 ,
                 as
                 of
                 
                   whites
                   of
                   Eggs
                
                 beaten
                 and
                 strained
                 ,
                 
                 of
                 
                   Honey
                   ,
                   Gum
                   of
                   Ivy
                   ,
                   strong
                   Wort
                   ,
                
                 these
                 ingredients
                 mingled
                 together
                 will
                 at
                 last
                 run
                 like
                 an
                 Oyl
                 ,
                 which
                 at
                 last
                 will
                 congeal
                 and
                 be
                 hard
                 .
                 Trouble
                 not
                 your self
                 to
                 make
                 it
                 ,
                 but
                 buy
                 it
                 readie
                 made
                 ;
                 chuse
                 it
                 as
                 you
                 do
                 the
                 Gum
                 -
                 Arabick
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 clearness
                 ,
                 and
                 then
                 you
                 need
                 not
                 fear
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 To
                 make
                 Water
                 thereof
                 ,
                 use
                 it
                 in
                 all
                 respects
                 as
                 you
                 did
                 your
                 Gum
                 -
                 Arabick
                 ,
                 by
                 tying
                 it
                 in
                 a
                 cloth
                 and
                 dissolving
                 it
                 in
                 fair
                 water
                 :
                 of
                 this
                 water
                 also
                 have
                 of
                 two
                 sorts
                 ,
                 a
                 weaker
                 and
                 a
                 stronger
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Of
                 GVM-ARMONIACK
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 this
                 Gum
                 you
                 may
                 make
                 a
                 Water
                 ,
                 that
                 whatsoever
                 you
                 write
                 therewith
                 you
                 may
                 lay
                 in
                 Gold.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 manner
                 of
                 making
                 the
                 Water
                 is
                 thus
                 ;
                 take
                 your
                 Gum
                 and
                 grind
                 it
                 with
                 the
                 juice
                 of
                 Garlick
                 as
                 fine
                 as
                 may
                 be
                 ,
                 thereunto
                 add
                 a
                 few
                 drops
                 of
                 weak
                 water
                 of
                 Gum
                 -
                 Arabick
                 ,
                 making
                 it
                 of
                 such
                 a
                 thickness
                 as
                 you
                 may
                 conveniently
                 write
                 with
                 it
                 with
                 a
                 pen.
                 
              
               
                 With
                 this
                 liquor
                 write
                 what
                 you
                 will
                 ,
                 and
                 let
                 it
                 drie
                 ,
                 but
                 not
                 too
                 long
                 ,
                 for
                 if
                 you
                 do
                 ,
                 the
                 Gold
                 will
                 not
                 stick
                 ,
                 and
                 if
                 you
                 lay
                 on
                 your
                 Gold
                 too
                 soon
                 ,
                 it
                 will
                 drown
                 it
                 .
                 When
                 you
                 would
                 lay
                 your
                 Gold
                 upon
                 it
                 being
                 drie
                 ,
                 do
                 thus
                 ,
                 get
                 a
                 Gold-cushion
                 ,
                 which
                 you
                 may
                 thus
                 make
                 ;
                 take
                 a
                 piece
                 of
                 Calves-leather
                 rough
                 ,
                 and
                 get
                 a
                 board
                 about
                 sixinches
                 long
                 ,
                 and
                 five
                 inches
                 broad
                 ,
                 upon
                 this
                 board
                 lay
                 some
                 woollen
                 cloth
                 four
                 or
                 five
                 times
                 double
                 ,
                 and
                 over
                 all
                 your
                 Leather
                 with
                 the
                 rough
                 side
                 outwards
                 ,
                 nailing
                 the
                 edges
                 of
                 the
                 leather
                 to
                 the
                 sides
                 of
                 the
                 board
                 ;
                 so
                 is
                 your
                 Cushion
                 made
                 .
              
               
                 Upon
                 this
                 Cushion
                 lay
                 your
                 Gold-leaf
                 ,
                 and
                 with
                 
                 a
                 knife
                 that
                 hath
                 a
                 very
                 sharp
                 edge
                 ,
                 cut
                 your
                 Gold
                 upon
                 your
                 Cushion
                 into
                 pieces
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 it
                 may
                 quite
                 cover
                 what
                 you
                 have
                 written
                 ,
                 then
                 breathe
                 upon
                 your
                 writing
                 ,
                 and
                 with
                 a
                 piece
                 of
                 white
                 Cotton-wool
                 (
                 breathing
                 upon
                 that
                 also
                 )
                 lay
                 it
                 upon
                 your
                 Gold
                 and
                 it
                 will
                 take
                 it
                 off
                 from
                 your
                 Cushion
                 ,
                 which
                 press
                 down
                 hard
                 upon
                 your
                 Writing
                 ,
                 and
                 it
                 will
                 there
                 stick
                 ;
                 then
                 with
                 other
                 Cotton-wool
                 dry
                 ,
                 wipe
                 away
                 the
                 loose
                 Gold
                 ,
                 and
                 your
                 Writing
                 only
                 will
                 remain
                 ,
                 which
                 when
                 it
                 is
                 through
                 drie
                 you
                 may
                 burnish
                 with
                 a
                 Tooth
                 ,
                 and
                 it
                 will
                 shew
                 fair
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Of
                 LIQVID
                 GOLD
                 or
                 SILVER
                 .
              
               
                 You
                 may
                 with
                 
                   Liquid
                   Gold
                
                 or
                 Silver
                 Draw
                 or
                 Write
                 any
                 thing
                 with
                 the
                 Pen
                 or
                 Pencil
                 ,
                 as
                 with
                 any
                 other
                 liquid
                 colour
                 ;
                 I
                 could
                 shew
                 you
                 how
                 to
                 make
                 it
                 ,
                 but
                 to
                 make
                 a
                 small
                 quantitie
                 it
                 is
                 not
                 worth
                 the
                 while
                 ,
                 neither
                 will
                 it
                 quit
                 the
                 cost
                 ;
                 therefore
                 I
                 would
                 advise
                 you
                 to
                 buy
                 it
                 readie
                 prepared
                 ,
                 which
                 you
                 may
                 do
                 where
                 you
                 buy
                 your
                 Colours
                 ,
                 or
                 of
                 some
                 Gold-beaters
                 ,
                 who
                 make
                 it
                 of
                 their
                 cuttings
                 of
                 the
                 ragged
                 edges
                 of
                 their
                 Gold.
                 
              
               
                 When
                 you
                 use
                 it
                 do
                 only
                 thus
                 ,
                 put
                 into
                 your
                 Shell
                 a
                 drop
                 or
                 two
                 of
                 fair
                 water
                 ,
                 and
                 with
                 a
                 clean
                 Pencil
                 tamper
                 up
                 so
                 much
                 Gold
                 as
                 will
                 serve
                 your
                 occasion
                 at
                 that
                 time
                 ,
                 with
                 which
                 Write
                 or
                 Draw
                 what
                 you
                 will
                 ;
                 then
                 about
                 two
                 or
                 three
                 hours
                 after
                 ,
                 the
                 longer
                 the
                 better
                 ,
                 burnish
                 it
                 by
                 rubbing
                 hard
                 upon
                 it
                 with
                 a
                 Dogs-tooth
                 ,
                 and
                 it
                 will
                 be
                 pure
                 Gold
                 ;
                 this
                 is
                 the
                 best
                 and
                 easiest
                 way
                 of
                 laying
                 Gold
                 that
                 I
                 know
                 of
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
             
               SECT
               .
               II.
               
                 Of
                 your
                 Grinding-stone
                 and
                 Muller
              
               .
            
             
               GEt
               a
               Stone
               of
               Porphery
               or
               Serpentine
               ,
               or
               rather
               a
               Pebble
               ,
               (
               if
               you
               light
               of
               one
               large
               enough
               )
               is
               best
               of
               any
               other
               .
               But
               in
               short
               ,
               get
               as
               good
               an
               one
               as
               you
               can
               ,
               which
               your
               Marblers
               in
               London
               may
               help
               you
               to
               ;
               keep
               this
               and
               your
               Muller
               alwayes
               very
               clean
               and
               free
               from
               dust
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               III.
               
                 Of
                 Colours
              
               .
            
             
               THere
               are
               simply
               six
               ,
               
                 viz.
                 White
                 ,
                 Black
                 ,
                 Red
                 ,
                 Green
                 ,
                 Yellow
                 ,
              
               and
               Blew
               ;
               to
               which
               we
               may
               add
               browns
               ,
               but
               they
               are
               compounded
               .
            
             
               Of
               either
               of
               these
               there
               are
               several
               sorts
               ,
               the
               names
               whereof
               ,
               and
               the
               manner
               of
               ordering
               of
               them
               shall
               be
               shewed
               in
               the
               ensuing
               Chapter
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             II.
             
          
           
             Of
             Colours
             used
             in
             Limning
             :
             their
             names
             ,
             and
             how
             to
             order
             them
             .
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               I.
               
                 Of
                 the
                 Names
                 of
                 Colours
                 ,
                 and
                 how
                 every
                 Colour
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 prepared
                 ;
                 whether
                 Grownd
                 ,
                 Wash'd
                 ,
                 or
                 Steep'd
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 
                   BLACKS
                   .
                   
                     
                       Cherry-stones
                       burnt
                       .
                    
                     
                       Ivory
                       burnt
                       .
                    
                     
                       Lamp-black
                       .
                    
                  
                
                 
                   WHITES
                   .
                   
                     
                       Ceruse
                       .
                    
                     
                       White-Lead
                       .
                    
                  
                
                 
                   REDS.
                   
                   
                     
                       Red-Lead
                       .
                    
                     
                       Lake
                       .
                    
                  
                
                 
                   
                   GREENS
                   .
                   
                     
                       Bise
                       .
                    
                     
                       Pink.
                       
                    
                     
                       Sap-green
                       .
                    
                     
                       Cedar-green
                       .
                    
                  
                
                 
                   BLEWS
                   .
                   
                     
                       Indico
                       .
                    
                     
                       Vltramarine
                       .
                    
                     
                       Bise
                       .
                    
                     
                       Smalt
                       .
                    
                  
                
                 
                   YELLOWS
                   .
                   
                     
                       English
                       Oker
                       .
                    
                     
                       Masticote
                       .
                    
                  
                
                 
                   BROWNS
                   .
                   
                     
                       Vmber
                       .
                    
                     
                       Spanish
                       Brown.
                       
                    
                     
                       Colen's
                       Earth
                       .
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               These
               are
               the
               principal
               Colours
               used
               in
               Limning
               ,
               I
               have
               omitted
               many
               others
               ,
               but
               they
               are
               such
               that
               are
               not
               fitting
               for
               this
               Work
               ,
               which
               I
               shall
               speak
               of
               when
               I
               come
               to
               teach
               how
               to
               Wash
               Maps
               and
               printed
               Pictures
               ,
               for
               which
               use
               those
               Colours
               I
               have
               omitted
               are
               only
               usefull
               .
            
             
               Of
               the
               Colours
               here
               mentioned
               ,
               usefull
               in
               Limning
               ,
               they
               are
               to
               be
               used
               three
               several
               wayes
               ,
               viz.
               either
               
                 Washed
                 ,
                 Grownd
              
               ,
               or
               Steeped
               .
            
             
               The
               Colours
               to
               be
               only
               Washed
               are
               these
               :
               
                 
                   Bise
                   .
                
                 
                   Cedar
                   .
                
                 
                   Red-Lead
                   .
                
                 
                   Smalt
                   .
                
                 
                   Vltramarine
                   .
                
                 
                   Masticote
                   .
                
              
            
             
               To
               be
               Steeped
               ,
               only
               Sap-green
               .
            
             
               The
               Colours
               to
               be
               Washed
               and
               Grownd
               ,
               are
               these
               :
               
                 
                   Ceruse
                   .
                
                 
                   White-Lead
                   .
                
                 
                   Lake
                   .
                
                 
                   English
                   Oker
                   .
                
                 
                   Pink.
                   
                
                 
                   Indico
                   .
                
                 
                   Vmber
                   .
                
                 
                   Colens
                   Earth
                   .
                
                 
                   Spanish
                   Brown.
                   
                
                 
                   black
                   
                     
                       Ivory
                       ,
                    
                     
                       &
                       Cherry-stone
                    
                  
                
              
            
          
           
             
             
               SECT
               .
               II.
               
                 Of
                 those
                 Colours
                 that
                 are
                 to
                 be
                 Grownd
                 ,
                 and
                 how
                 to
                 Grind
                 them
                 .
              
            
             
               I
               Have
               in
               the
               last
               Section
               told
               you
               what
               Colours
               are
               to
               be
               Grownd
               ,
               which
               Washed
               ,
               and
               which
               to
               be
               Steeped
               ;
               it
               resteth
               now
               ,
               to
               shew
               you
               how
               to
               Grind
               those
               Colours
               that
               are
               to
               be
               grownd
               ;
               I
               shall
               not
               run
               over
               every
               Colour
               particularly
               ,
               but
               shew
               you
               how
               to
               grind
               one
               Colour
               ,
               which
               take
               as
               an
               example
               for
               all
               the
               rest
               .
            
             
               For
               our
               example
               in
               grinding
               of
               Colours
               ,
               let
               us
               take
               the
               original
               of
               Colours
               ,
               viz.
               Ceruse
               ,
               or
               White-lead
               ,
               there
               is
               little
               difference
               between
               them
               ,
               only
               one
               is
               refined
               ,
               the
               other
               not
               .
            
             
               To
               grind
               it
               do
               thus
               ;
               Take
               a
               quantitie
               thereof
               ,
               or
               of
               any
               other
               Colour
               to
               be
               grownd
               ,
               being
               cleansed
               from
               all
               manner
               of
               dirt
               or
               filth
               ,
               which
               you
               must
               first
               scrape
               off
               ;
               then
               lay
               the
               Colour
               upon
               your
               Stone
               ,
               and
               with
               your
               Muller
               bruise
               it
               a
               little
               ,
               then
               put
               thereto
               fair
               spring-water
               ,
               and
               between
               your
               Muller
               and
               Stone
               grind
               the
               Colour
               well
               together
               with
               the
               water
               till
               the
               Colour
               be
               very
               fine
               ,
               which
               when
               you
               find
               to
               be
               enough
               ,
               have
               in
               a
               readiness
               a
               great
               Chalk-stone
               ,
               in
               which
               make
               certain
               troughs
               or
               surrows
               ,
               into
               which
               pour
               your
               Colour
               thus
               grownd
               ,
               and
               there
               let
               it
               rest
               till
               it
               be
               thorough
               drie
               ,
               then
               take
               it
               out
               and
               reserve
               it
               in
               papers
               ,
               and
               those
               papers
               in
               boxes
               ,
               for
               your
               use
               .
               This
               order
               you
               are
               to
               observe
               in
               all
               Colours
               that
               are
               to
               be
               Grownd
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               SECT
               .
               III.
               
                 Of
                 those
                 Colours
                 that
                 are
                 to
                 be
                 Washed
                 ,
                 and
                 how
                 to
                 Wash
                 them
                 .
              
            
             
               AS
               in
               the
               Grinding
               of
               Colours
               I
               gave
               you
               an
               instance
               but
               in
               one
               for
               all
               the
               rest
               ,
               the
               like
               I
               shall
               do
               for
               those
               Colours
               which
               are
               to
               be
               Washed
               ;
               I
               will
               make
               my
               instance
               in
               Red-lead
               ,
               which
               you
               are
               to
               Wash
               in
               this
               manner
               .
            
             
               Put
               a
               quantity
               thereof
               into
               a
               clean
               earthen
               dish
               ,
               and
               pour
               thereto
               fair
               water
               ,
               stirring
               the
               colour
               and
               water
               together
               with
               your
               hand
               or
               otherwise
               ,
               then
               let
               it
               stand
               a
               while
               ,
               and
               you
               shall
               see
               a
               filthy
               greasie
               scum
               arise
               and
               lie
               above
               the
               water
               ,
               with
               other
               filth
               ;
               pour
               this
               water
               quite
               away
               ,
               and
               put
               other
               clean
               water
               to
               the
               Colour
               ,
               and
               stir
               it
               about
               again
               ,
               pouring
               away
               the
               water
               (
               if
               foul
               )
               the
               second
               or
               third
               time
               ;
               then
               add
               more
               water
               ,
               and
               stir
               the
               Colour
               about
               again
               till
               the
               water
               be
               thick
               and
               troubled
               ;
               but
               yet
               free
               from
               filth
               ,
               then
               gently
               pour
               this
               troubled
               water
               into
               a
               second
               earthen
               dish
               ,
               leaving
               in
               the
               first
               dish
               all
               the
               dregs
               .
            
             
               Into
               the
               second
               bason
               put
               more
               fair
               water
               ,
               and
               with
               your
               hand
               stir
               about
               the
               Colour
               as
               before
               ;
               do
               thus
               two
               or
               three
               times
               ,
               and
               take
               (
               if
               your
               Colour
               be
               very
               foul
               )
               a
               third
               earthen
               dish
               ,
               and
               add
               more
               water
               ,
               and
               keep
               stirring
               ,
               till
               at
               last
               the
               water
               become
               clear
               ,
               and
               the
               Colour
               remain
               fine
               at
               the
               bottom
               of
               the
               dish
               ;
               pour
               away
               your
               water
               gently
               ,
               and
               you
               will
               find
               some
               Colour
               remaining
               and
               sticking
               to
               the
               edges
               of
               the
               dish
               ,
               which
               when
               it
               is
               dry
               ,
               you
               may
               
               (
               with
               a
               feather
               )
               strike
               away
               like
               flower
               ,
               which
               reserve
               as
               the
               choicest
               and
               purest
               of
               all
               ;
               if
               in
               a
               pound
               of
               this
               Red-lead
               you
               have
               an
               ounce
               of
               good
               indeed
               ,
               Prize
               it
               ,
               for
               it
               is
               troublesome
               to
               procure
               .
               The
               other
               ,
               which
               is
               not
               altogether
               so
               pure
               ,
               may
               be
               serviceable
               for
               some
               uses
               ,
               though
               not
               for
               all
               .
               What
               hath
               been
               said
               of
               this
               Colour
               is
               to
               be
               understood
               of
               all
               other
               that
               are
               to
               be
               washed
               ;
               there●ore
               for
               Washing
               of
               Colours
               let
               this
               suffice
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               IV.
               
                 Of
                 Colours
                 to
                 be
                 Steeped
              
               .
            
             
               I
               Said
               (
               among
               the
               Colours
               before
               mentioned
               )
               there
               was
               only
               
                 Sap
                 green
              
               to
               be
               Steeped
               ,
               though
               in
               Colours
               to
               wash
               Maps
               and
               Prints
               there
               are
               many
               ,
               but
               of
               these
               ,
               when
               we
               come
               to
               shew
               how
               to
               Wash
               Maps
               ,
               &c.
               
               To
               Steep
               your
               
                 Sap
                 green
              
               do
               thus
               ,
               take
               a
               quantity
               thereof
               and
               put
               it
               into
               a
               Shell
               ,
               and
               fill
               the
               shell
               with
               fair
               water
               ,
               to
               which
               adde
               some
               fine
               powder
               of
               Allum
               to
               raise
               the
               colour
               ;
               let
               it
               thus
               steep
               twenty
               four
               hours
               ,
               and
               you
               will
               have
               a
               very
               good
               Green.
               
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               V.
               
                 Of
                 those
                 Colours
                 that
                 are
                 Washed
                 and
                 Grownd
                 ,
                 how
                 to
                 temper
                 them
                 in
                 your
                 shells
                 when
                 you
                 are
                 to
                 use
                 them
                 .
              
            
             
               YOu
               having
               all
               Colours
               both
               Grownd
               and
               Washed
               by
               you
               in
               a
               readiness
               ,
               when
               you
               begin
               
               any
               piece
               you
               must
               temper
               them
               as
               followeth
               ,
               for
               which
               take
               one
               example
               ●or
               all
               .
            
             
               Take
               any
               Colour
               ,
               a
               small
               quantitie
               thereof
               ,
               and
               put
               it
               into
               a
               clean
               shell
               ,
               then
               add
               thereunto
               a
               drop
               or
               two
               of
               Gum-water
               ,
               and
               with
               your
               finger
               (
               being
               clean
               )
               work
               it
               about
               the
               sides
               of
               the
               shell
               ,
               and
               there
               let
               it
               stick
               till
               it
               be
               dry
               ;
               when
               the
               colour
               is
               dry
               in
               the
               shell
               ,
               draw
               your
               finger
               over
               it
               ;
               if
               any
               Colour
               come
               off
               ,
               you
               must
               add
               stronger
               Gum
               water
               to
               it
               .
               But
               ,
               if
               when
               your
               Colour
               is
               dry
               in
               the
               shell
               ,
               it
               glitter
               or
               shine
               ,
               it
               is
               a
               sign
               there
               is
               too
               much
               Gum
               in
               it
               ;
               therefore
               remedy
               that
               by
               tempering
               your
               Colour
               up
               again
               with
               fair
               water
               only
               ,
               without
               any
               Gum.
               
            
             
               There
               are
               some
               Colours
               ,
               as
               
                 Lake
                 ,
                 Vmber
              
               ,
               and
               other
               hard
               Colours
               ,
               which
               when
               they
               are
               dry
               in
               the
               shell
               will
               crack
               ,
               and
               look
               like
               parched
               ground
               in
               a
               drie
               Summer
               ;
               to
               such
               colours
               as
               these
               ,
               when
               you
               temper
               them
               for
               use
               ,
               add
               to
               them
               a
               small
               quantity
               of
               white
               Sugar-candy
               in
               fine
               powder
               ,
               which
               temper
               with
               your
               Colour
               and
               fair
               water
               with
               your
               finger
               in
               the
               shell
               till
               the
               Candy
               be
               dissolved
               ;
               and
               this
               will
               keep
               them
               from
               peeling
               when
               you
               have
               laid
               them
               on
               your
               Work.
               
            
             
               Note
               here
               ,
               that
               these
               Colours
               following
               ,
               
                 viz.
                 Vmber
              
               ,
               panish
               -
               Brown
               ,
               Colen
               -
               
                 Earth
                 ,
                 Cherry-stone
              
               and
               Ivory-black
               are
               to
               be
               burnt
               before
               they
               be
               Wash'd
               or
               Grownd
               .
            
             
               To
               burn
               any
               of
               them
               do
               thus
               ,
               put
               the
               Colour
               into
               a
               Crucible
               ,
               such
               as
               Gold-smiths
               melt
               their
               silver
               in
               ;
               if
               you
               will
               ,
               cover
               the
               mouth
               thereof
               with
               clay
               ,
               and
               set
               it
               in
               a
               hot
               fire
               ,
               there
               let
               it
               rest
               till
               it
               be
               red
               hot
               when
               the
               Colour
               is
               cold
               you
               may
               Grind
               or
               Wash
               it
               according
               to
               former
               Directions
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               SECT
               .
               VI.
               
                 Of
                 Pencils
                 ,
                 and
                 how
                 to
                 choose
                 them
                 .
              
            
             
               YOu
               are
               in
               the
               next
               place
               to
               furnish
               your self
               with
               Pencils
               of
               all
               sorts
               ;
               which
               how
               to
               choose
               do
               thus
               ,
               take
               a
               Pencil
               and
               put
               the
               hairy
               end
               between
               your
               lips
               ,
               wetting
               it
               a
               little
               by
               drawing
               it
               through
               your
               lips
               ,
               being
               moist
               ,
               two
               or
               three
               times
               ;
               so
               that
               the
               Pencil
               being
               large
               will
               come
               to
               a
               point
               as
               small
               as
               a
               hair
               ,
               which
               if
               it
               do
               ,
               it
               is
               good
               ;
               but
               if
               it
               spread
               ,
               or
               any
               extravagant
               hairs
               stick
               out
               of
               the
               sides
               ,
               they
               are
               naught
               ;
               you
               may
               try
               them
               by
               wetting
               in
               your
               mouth
               ,
               and
               attempt
               to
               draw
               a
               line
               on
               the
               back
               of
               your
               hand
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               VII
               .
               
                 Of
                 Compounded
                 Colours
              
               .
            
             
               OF
               the
               the
               six
               simple
               Colours
               before
               named
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Browns
               ,
               many
               others
               may
               be
               compounded
               for
               
                 Faces
                 of
                 all
                 Complexions
                 ,
                 Garments
                 ,
                 Landskips
                 ,
                 Building
              
               ;
               for
               
                 Birds
                 ,
                 Fishes
                 ,
                 Beasts
              
               ,
               and
               what
               not
               ?
               I
               will
               shew
               how
               to
               compound
               some
               ,
               and
               by
               those
               you
               may
               by
               practice
               find
               out
               and
               invent
               infinite
               more
               ,
               I
               shall
               instance
               in
               these
               following
               .
               As
               ,
               
                 
                   A
                   Violet
                   .
                
                 
                   A
                   Lead-colour
                   .
                
                 
                   Flame-colour
                   .
                
                 
                   Scarlet
                   .
                
                 
                   Light-green
                
                 
                   Purple
                   .
                
                 
                   A
                   Bay-colour
                   .
                
                 
                   A
                   Murrey
                   .
                
              
            
             
             
               
                 To
                 make
                 a
                 Violet-colour
                 .
              
               
                 Indico
                 ,
                 White
              
               ,
               and
               Lake
               make
               a
               good
               Violet-colour
               ;
               you
               may
               make
               it
               lighter
               or
               darker
               at
               pleasure
               ,
               as
               you
               may
               all
               other
               compounded
               Colours
               .
            
             
               
                 Lead-colour
                 .
              
               Indico
               and
               White
               make
               a
               Lead-colour
               .
            
             
               
                 Colour
                 for
                 Flaming
                 fire
                 .
              
               Red-lead
               and
               Masticote
               ,
               heightned
               with
               White
               .
            
             
               
                 Scarlet-colour
                 .
              
               
                 Red-lead
                 ,
                 Lake
              
               and
               Vermilion
               ,
               very
               little
               or
               no
               Vermilion
               ,
               for
               it
               is
               not
               good
               in
               Limning
               .
            
             
               
                 Light-green
                 .
              
               Pink
               and
               Smalt
               ,
               with
               White
               to
               make
               it
               lighter
               ,
               if
               you
               require
               it
               .
            
             
               
                 A
                 Purple-colour
                 .
              
               Indico
               ,
               Spanish
               -
               brown
               ,
               and
               White
               .
            
             
               
                 A
                 Bay-colour
                 .
              
               Spanish
               -
               brown
               and
               White
               .
            
             
               
                 A
                 Murrey-colour
                 .
              
               Lake
               and
               White
               make
               a
               Murrey-colour
               .
            
             
               Of
               these
               infinite
               others
               may
               be
               made
               ,
               but
               I
               leave
               them
               to
               your
               own
               ingenuity
               to
               find
               out
               ,
               which
               with
               little
               practice
               you
               will
               soon
               do
               .
               The
               next
               thing
               you
               shall
               be
               informed
               in
               ,
               is
               how
               to
               prepare
               your
               Table
               for
               Limning
               ,
               and
               fit
               all
               things
               for
               your
               work
               ,
               which
               shall
               be
               declared
               in
               the
               next
               Chapter
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             III.
             
          
           
             
               How
               to
               prepare
               a
               Table
               for
               a
               Picture
               in
               small
               for
               Limning
               ,
               to
               make
               choice
               of
               your
               Light
               ,
               the
               manner
               of
               Sitting
               in
               respect
               o●
               Position
               and
               Distance
               ,
               and
               what
               necessary
               Instruments
               are
               to
               lie
               by
               you
               when
               you
               are
               at
               work
               .
            
          
           
             WE
             now
             draw
             pretty
             near
             to
             our
             intended
             purpose
             ,
             viz.
             Miniture
             or
             Limning
             to
             the
             life
             in
             Water-Colours
             :
             but
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               I.
               
                 How
                 to
                 prepare
                 a
                 Table
                 for
                 a
                 Picture
                 in
                 small
                 .
              
            
             
               GET
               pure
               fine
               Paste-board
               ,
               such
               as
               the
               ordinary
               playing
               Cards
               are
               made
               of
               ,
               you
               may
               have
               of
               what
               size
               and
               thickness
               you
               please
               ,
               and
               very
               finely
               slick'd
               and
               glazed
               ,
               at
               the
               Card-makers
               :
               Take
               a
               piece
               of
               this
               Paste-board
               of
               the
               size
               you
               intend
               your
               Picture
               ,
               then
               take
               a
               piece
               of
               Parchment
               of
               the
               finest
               and
               whitest
               you
               can
               get
               ,
               which
               are
               the
               skins
               of
               abortives
               or
               costlings
               ,
               cut
               a
               piece
               of
               this
               skin
               of
               equal
               bigness
               with
               your
               Paste-board
               ,
               and
               with
               thin
               white
               Starch
               new
               made
               paste
               the
               Parchment
               to
               the
               Paste-board
               ,
               with
               the
               out-side
               of
               the
               skin
               outermost
               ;
               lay
               on
               your
               Starch
               very
               thin
               and
               even
               ;
               then
               your
               Grinding-stone
               being
               made
               very
               clean
               ,
               lay
               the
               Card
               thereupon
               with
               
               the
               Parchment-side
               downwards
               ,
               and
               as
               hard
               as
               you
               can
               ,
               rub
               the
               other
               side
               of
               the
               Paste-board
               with
               a
               Boars
               tooth
               set
               in
               a
               stick
               for
               that
               purpose
               ,
               when
               it
               is
               through
               drie
               it
               is
               fit
               to
               work
               upon
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               II.
               
                 Of
                 your
                 Light.
              
               
            
             
               COncerning
               your
               Light
               ,
               let
               it
               be
               fair
               and
               large
               ,
               free
               from
               being
               shadowed
               with
               trees
               or
               houses
               ,
               but
               a
               clear
               sky-light
               ,
               let
               it
               be
               a
               direct
               light
               from
               above
               ,
               and
               not
               a
               traverse-light
               ;
               let
               it
               be
               a
               Northerly
               and
               not
               a
               Southerly
               light
               ,
               for
               the
               Sun
               shining
               either
               upon
               you
               ,
               your
               work
               ,
               or
               the
               partie
               sitting
               ,
               will
               be
               very
               prejudici●l
               ;
               as
               your
               room
               must
               be
               light
               ,
               so
               let
               it
               be
               also
               close
               and
               clean
               .
               And
               observe
               ,
               that
               you
               begin
               and
               end
               your
               work
               by
               the
               same
               light
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               III.
               
                 Of
                 the
                 manner
                 of
                 Sitting
              
               .
            
             
               LEt
               your
               Desk
               on
               which
               you
               work
               be
               so
               situate
               ,
               that
               when
               you
               sit
               before
               it
               your
               left
               arme
               may
               be
               towards
               your
               light
               ,
               and
               your
               right
               arme
               from
               it
               ,
               that
               the
               light
               may
               strike
               in
               sideling
               upon
               your
               Work.
               Thus
               for
               your
               own
               sitting
               .
            
             
               Now
               for
               the
               manner
               of
               the
               parties
               sitting
               that
               is
               to
               be
               Drawn
               ,
               it
               may
               be
               in
               what
               posture
               he
               or
               she
               shall
               design
               ;
               but
               let
               the
               posture
               be
               what
               it
               will
               ,
               let
               it
               not
               be
               above
               two
               yards
               off
               you
               at
               the
               most
               ,
               and
               level
               with
               you
               ;
               but
               if
               the
               partie
               be
               tall
               ,
               then
               above
               .
            
             
             
               Mark
               well
               when
               the
               party
               that
               sits
               moveth
               ,
               though
               never
               so
               little
               ,
               for
               the
               least
               motion
               of
               the
               body
               of
               face
               ,
               if
               not
               recalled
               ,
               may
               in
               short
               time
               cause
               you
               to
               run
               into
               many
               errours
               .
            
             
               The
               Face
               of
               a
               party
               being
               finished
               ,
               let
               him
               stand
               and
               not
               sit
               to
               have
               his
               posture
               drawn
               ,
               and
               that
               at
               a
               farther
               distance
               than
               two
               yards
               ,
               viz.
               four
               or
               five
               yards
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               IV.
               
                 Of
                 such
                 necessaries
                 as
                 are
                 to
                 lie
                 by
                 you
                 while
                 you
                 are
                 at
                 work
                 .
              
            
             
               1.
               
               YOu
               must
               have
               two
               small
               Sawcers
               or
               other
               China-dishes
               ,
               in
               either
               of
               which
               there
               must
               be
               pure
               clean
               Water
               ;
               the
               one
               of
               them
               is
               to
               wash
               your
               Pencils
               in
               being
               foul
               ,
               the
               other
               to
               temper
               your
               Colours
               with
               when
               there
               is
               occasion
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               A
               large
               ,
               but
               clean
               ,
               fine
               and
               dry
               Pencil
               ,
               to
               cleanse
               your
               work
               from
               any
               kind
               of
               dust
               that
               may
               by
               accident
               fall
               upon
               it
               :
               such
               Pencils
               they
               call
               Fitch-Pencils
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               A
               sharp
               Pen-knife
               to
               take
               off
               hairs
               that
               may
               come
               from
               your
               Pencil
               ,
               either
               among
               your
               Colours
               or
               upon
               your
               Work
               ,
               or
               to
               take
               out
               spots
               that
               may
               come
               to
               fall
               upon
               your
               Card.
               
            
             
               4.
               
               A
               Paper
               ,
               having
               a
               hole
               cut
               therein
               ,
               to
               lay
               upon
               your
               Card
               to
               cover
               it
               from
               dust
               ,
               and
               to
               rest
               your
               hand
               upon
               ,
               to
               keep
               the
               soil
               and
               sweat
               of
               your
               hand
               from
               fullying
               your
               Parchment
               ,
               and
               also
               to
               try
               your
               Pencils
               on
               before
               you
               apply
               them
               to
               your
               
               Work.
               Let
               your
               Sawcers
               of
               Water
               ,
               your
               Pen-knife
               and
               Pencils
               lie
               all
               on
               your
               right
               hand
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               Have
               a
               pretty
               quantitie
               of
               Carnation
               (
               as
               some
               call
               it
               ,
               )
               or
               Flesh-colour
               ,
               somewhat
               lighter
               than
               the
               Complexion
               of
               the
               party
               you
               are
               to
               draw
               ,
               tempered
               up
               in
               a
               shell
               by
               it self
               with
               a
               weak
               Gum-water
               .
               If
               it
               be
               a
               Fair
               complexion
               ,
               White-lead
               and
               Red-lead
               mixed
               .
               If
               a
               Swarthie
               or
               Brown
               complexion
               ,
               to
               your
               White
               and
               Red-lead
               add
               a
               quantitie
               of
               Masticote
               ,
               or
               English-Oker
               ,
               or
               both
               if
               occasion
               be
               .
               But
               whatever
               the
               Complexion
               be
               ,
               be
               sure
               you
               temper
               your
               Flesh-colour
               lighter
               than
               the
               partie
               ;
               for
               by
               often
               working
               upon
               it
               you
               may
               bring
               it
               to
               its
               true
               colour
               ,
               it
               being
               first
               too
               light
               ;
               but
               if
               it
               be
               first
               too
               sad
               ,
               there
               then
               is
               no
               remedy
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               Having
               prepared
               your
               Flesh-colour
               ,
               take
               a
               large
               Shell
               of
               
                 Mother
                 of
                 Pearl
              
               ,
               or
               a
               Horse-Mussel-Shell
               ,
               which
               any
               Fisherman
               will
               help
               you
               to
               ,
               and
               therein
               (
               as
               Painters
               in
               Oyl
               dispose
               their
               Colours
               upon
               their
               Pallat
               for
               their
               working
               of
               a
               Face
               ,
               so
               must
               you
               )
               place
               your
               several
               Shadows
               in
               this
               Shell
               in
               little
               places
               one
               distinct
               from
               another
               .
            
             
               Note
               ,
               that
               in
               all
               your
               Shadows
               you
               must
               use
               some
               White
               ,
               wherefore
               1.
               lay
               a
               good
               quantitie
               of
               White
               by
               it self
               ,
               besides
               what
               the
               Shadows
               are
               first
               tempered
               with
               .
               2.
               
               For
               Red
               for
               the
               Cheeks
               and
               Lips
               ,
               temper
               Lake
               and
               Red-lead
               together
               ,
               some
               use
               Vermilion
               ,
               but
               I
               like
               it
               not
               .
               3.
               
               For
               your
               Blew
               Shadows
               ,
               as
               under
               the
               Eyes
               ,
               and
               in
               Veins
               ,
               &c.
               
               Indico
               and
               White
               ,
               or
               Ultamarine
               and
               White
               .
               4.
               
               For
               your
               Gray
               ,
               faintish
               Shadows
               ,
               take
               White
               English-Oker
               and
               Indico
               ,
               or
               sometimes
               Masticote
               .
               5.
               or
               
               
                 Deep
                 shadows
              
               ,
               White
               ,
               English-Oker
               ,
               and
               Umber
               .
               6.
               
               For
               Dark-shadows
               in
               mens
               Faces
               ,
               Lake
               and
               Pink
               ,
               which
               make
               an
               excellent
               fleshy
               shadow
               .
               Many
               other
               Shadows
               you
               may
               temper
               up
               ,
               but
               these
               are
               the
               chief
               ;
               your
               own
               judgement
               ,
               when
               you
               look
               upon
               the
               partie
               to
               be
               Drawn
               ,
               will
               best
               direct
               you
               ,
               and
               inform
               your
               fancie
               better
               than
               a
               thousand
               Words
               .
            
             
               Thus
               are
               you
               absolutely
               prepared
               of
               all
               necessaries
               ,
               it
               is
               now
               fit
               time
               to
               go
               to
               work
               ;
               and
               first
               we
               will
               begin
               with
               a
               Face
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             IV.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             Miniture
             or
             Limning
             of
             a
             Face
             in
             Water-Colours
             .
          
           
             HAving
             all
             things
             in
             a
             readiness
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             directions
             before
             delivered
             ,
             upon
             that
             part
             of
             your
             Card
             where
             you
             intend
             the
             Face
             of
             your
             picture
             to
             be
             ,
             lay
             that
             part
             of
             the
             Card
             over
             with
             your
             Colour
             that
             you
             have
             before
             prepared
             ,
             answerable
             to
             the
             Complexion
             of
             the
             partie
             ;
             it
             being
             well
             tempered
             ,
             pretty
             thin
             ,
             with
             a
             ●encil
             bigger
             than
             ordinary
             ,
             spread
             your
             Colour
             very
             even
             and
             thin
             ,
             free
             from
             hairs
             or
             other
             spots
             ,
             in
             your
             Pencil
             ,
             over
             the
             place
             where
             you
             are
             to
             make
             the
             Face
             of
             your
             Picture
             .
             The
             Ground
             being
             laid
             ,
             you
             may
             begin
             the
             Draught
             ,
             the
             partie
             being
             ready
             to
             sit
             .
             Now
             to
             the
             finishing
             of
             a
             Face
             there
             will
             require
             three
             Operations
             or
             Sittings
             at
             
             the
             least
             .
             At
             the
             first
             sitting
             you
             do
             only
             dead
             Colour
             the
             Face
             ,
             and
             this
             takes
             about
             two
             hours
             time
             .
             At
             the
             second
             sitting
             you
             are
             to
             go
             over
             the
             Face
             more
             curiously
             ,
             observing
             whatsoever
             may
             conduce
             to
             the
             graces
             or
             deformities
             of
             the
             partie
             to
             to
             be
             Drawn
             ,
             together
             with
             a
             sweet
             dispose
             and
             couching
             of
             the
             Colours
             one
             within
             another
             ,
             and
             this
             sitting
             will
             take
             up
             some
             four
             or
             five
             hours
             .
             At
             the
             third
             sitting
             you
             may
             finish
             the
             Face
             ,
             this
             takes
             up
             some
             three
             hours
             time
             ;
             in
             which
             you
             perfect
             what
             was
             before
             imperfect
             and
             rough
             ,
             in
             putting
             the
             deep
             and
             dark
             shadows
             in
             the
             Face
             ;
             as
             in
             the
             Eyes
             ,
             Eye
             brows
             hair
             ,
             and
             Ears
             ,
             which
             things
             are
             the
             last
             of
             the
             Work
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             be
             done
             till
             the
             Hair-curtain
             or
             the
             back-side
             of
             the
             Picture
             ,
             as
             also
             the
             Drapery
             be
             wholly
             finished
             .
             Of
             these
             three
             sittings
             or
             operations
             we
             shall
             make
             three
             Sections
             ,
             as
             followeth
             :
             Then
             in
             the
             next
             Chapter
             shew
             how
             the
             Drapery
             and
             other
             ornaments
             are
             to
             be
             performed
             :
             then
             in
             the
             next
             Chapter
             something
             of
             Landskip
             in
             Miniture
             ,
             or
             Limning
             ,
             and
             so
             conclude
             .
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               I.
               
                 At
                 the
                 first
                 Operation
                 or
                 Sitting
                 .
              
            
             
               YOur
               Ground
               for
               the
               general
               Complexion
               being
               laid
               ,
               the
               first
               work
               at
               your
               first
               sitting
               must
               be
               to
               draw
               the
               Porphile
               or
               out-lines
               of
               the
               Face
               ,
               which
               you
               must
               do
               with
               Lake
               and
               White
               mingled
               ;
               draw
               it
               very
               faintly
               ,
               so
               that
               if
               you
               miss
               of
               
               your
               Proportion
               you
               may
               alter
               it
               with
               a
               deeper
               mixture
               of
               the
               same
               Colour
               .
            
             
               The
               proportion
               of
               the
               Face
               being
               drawn
               ,
               add
               to
               the
               former
               colour
               some
               Red-lead
               ,
               temper
               it
               to
               the
               colour
               of
               the
               Cheeks
               ,
               Lips
               ,
               &c.
               but
               faintly
               ,
               for
               (
               as
               I
               said
               before
               )
               you
               cannot
               lighten
               a
               deep
               Colour
               when
               you
               would
               .
               You
               must
               now
               put
               in
               the
               Red
               shadows
               in
               their
               due
               places
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               Cheeks
               ,
               Lips
               ,
               tip
               of
               the
               Chin
               ,
               about
               the
               Eyes
               ,
               the
               tip
               of
               the
               Ears
               ,
               and
               about
               the
               roots
               of
               the
               Hair.
               All
               these
               Shadows
               must
               be
               put
               in
               ,
               not
               with
               the
               flat
               of
               the
               Pencil
               ,
               but
               by
               small
               touches
               ,
               after
               the
               manner
               of
               Hatching
               ;
               in
               this
               manner
               going
               over
               the
               Face
               ,
               you
               will
               cover
               your
               ground
               with
               these
               and
               the
               following
               shadows
               .
               In
               this
               Dead-colouring
               you
               need
               not
               be
               over-curious
               ,
               but
               strive
               to
               imitate
               Nature
               as
               near
               as
               may
               be
               ,
               the
               roughness
               of
               the
               Colours
               may
               be
               mended
               at
               the
               second
               Operation
               .
            
             
               Having
               put
               in
               your
               Red
               shadows
               in
               their
               due
               places
               ,
               put
               in
               next
               your
               faint
               Blew
               shadows
               about
               the
               corners
               and
               balls
               of
               the
               Eyes
               ,
               and
               your
               Grayish
               blew
               shadows
               under
               the
               Eyes
               and
               about
               the
               Temples
               ;
               work
               these
               sweetly
               and
               faintly
               all
               over
               by
               degrees
               ,
               heightning
               your
               shadows
               as
               the
               light
               falls
               ;
               as
               also
               those
               harder
               shadows
               in
               the
               dark
               side
               of
               the
               Face
               ,
               under
               the
               Eye-browes
               ,
               Nose
               ,
               Chin
               ,
               and
               Neck
               ,
               with
               some
               stronger
               touches
               in
               those
               places
               than
               on
               the
               light
               side
               of
               the
               Face
               .
               Bring
               all
               your
               Work
               together
               to
               an
               equal
               roundness
               ,
               and
               give
               perfection
               to
               no
               particular
               part
               at
               this
               time
               ,
               but
               view
               your
               object
               well
               ,
               and
               see
               how
               near
               you
               hit
               the
               Life
               ,
               not
               only
               in
               seeming
               likeness
               ,
               but
               in
               roundness
               boldness
               of
               posture
               ,
               colouring
               ,
               and
               such
               like
               .
            
             
             
               Having
               wrought
               your
               fainter
               shadows
               into
               the
               Red
               ones
               before
               laid
               ,
               you
               may
               now
               have
               a
               touch
               at
               the
               Hair
               ,
               disposing
               of
               it
               into
               such
               curls
               ,
               folds
               ,
               or
               form
               as
               shall
               best
               grace
               the
               picture
               ,
               or
               please
               the
               partie
               .
               You
               must
               only
               draw
               the
               Hair
               with
               some
               colour
               suitable
               to
               the
               life
               ,
               fill
               up
               the
               empty
               and
               void
               places
               with
               colour
               ,
               and
               deepen
               it
               somewhat
               more
               strongly
               than
               before
               in
               the
               deepest
               shadowed
               places
               .
               And
               let
               this
               be
               your
               first
               operation
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               II.
               
                 At
                 the
                 second
                 Operation
                 or
                 Sitting
                 .
              
            
             
               AT
               the
               second
               sitting
               let
               the
               partie
               sit
               in
               the
               same
               place
               and
               posture
               as
               he
               did
               at
               the
               first
               sitting
               ,
               then
               observe
               and
               delineate
               with
               your
               Pencil
               those
               varieties
               which
               Nature
               affords
               you
               ;
               and
               as
               you
               did
               them
               but
               rudely
               before
               ,
               you
               must
               now
               with
               the
               same
               Colours
               ,
               in
               the
               same
               places
               ,
               by
               working
               drive
               and
               sweeten
               the
               same
               Colours
               one
               into
               another
               ,
               so
               that
               no
               lump
               of
               Colour
               ,
               or
               any
               rough
               edge
               may
               appear
               in
               your
               whole
               work
               ,
               and
               this
               work
               must
               be
               performed
               with
               a
               Pencil
               somewhat
               sharper
               then
               that
               which
               you
               used
               before
               ,
               so
               as
               your
               Shadows
               may
               be
               soft
               and
               smooth
               .
            
             
               Having
               made
               this
               progress
               in
               the
               Face
               ,
               leave
               it
               for
               this
               time
               ,
               and
               go
               to
               the
               back-side
               of
               your
               Picture
               ;
               which
               is
               sometimes
               a
               piece
               of
               Landskip
               ,
               but
               most
               commonly
               a
               Curtain
               of
               blew
               of
               red
               Sattin
               .
               If
               it
               be
               of
               blew
               Sattin
               ,
               temper
               as
               much
               Bise
               in
               a
               shell
               as
               will
               cover
               a
               Card
               ,
               let
               it
               be
               moist
               ,
               but
               well
               bound
               with
               Gum
               ;
               then
               with
               a
               Pencil
               draw
               the
               Porphile
               or
               
               out-line
               of
               your
               Curtain
               ,
               as
               also
               of
               your
               Picture
               ,
               then
               with
               a
               large
               Pencil
               lay
               over
               carefully
               ,
               but
               thin
               and
               aery
               ,
               the
               whole
               ground
               you
               mean
               to
               lay
               with
               Blew
               ;
               then
               afterwards
               again
               with
               a
               large
               Pencil
               ,
               as
               before
               ,
               lay
               over
               the
               same
               again
               with
               a
               substantial
               bodie
               of
               colour
               ;
               in
               doing
               of
               which
               you
               must
               be
               expeditious
               ,
               keeping
               your
               Colour
               alwayes
               moist
               ,
               letting
               no
               one
               part
               thereof
               be
               dry
               till
               you
               have
               covered
               the
               whole
               .
            
             
               If
               your
               Curtain
               be
               Crimson
               ,
               then
               trace
               it
               out
               with
               Lake
               ,
               and
               lay
               the
               ground
               with
               a
               thin
               colour
               ,
               then
               where
               your
               strong
               lights
               and
               reflexions
               fall
               ,
               there
               lay
               your
               lights
               with
               a
               thin
               and
               Waterish
               colour
               ,
               and
               while
               the
               ground
               is
               yet
               wet
               ,
               with
               a
               strong
               and
               dark
               colour
               tempered
               reasonable
               thick
               ,
               lay
               the
               hard
               and
               strong
               shadows
               close
               by
               the
               other
               lights
               .
            
             
               After
               you
               have
               thus
               laid
               the
               back-side
               of
               your
               Picture
               with
               Blew
               ,
               or
               Red
               ,
               or
               any
               other
               Colour
               ,
               lay
               your
               Linnen
               with
               a
               fair
               White
               ,
               and
               the
               Drapery
               likewise
               flat
               of
               the
               colour
               you
               intend
               it
               .
            
             
               Then
               repair
               to
               the
               Face
               again
               ,
               and
               view
               your
               object
               well
               ,
               and
               see
               what
               shadows
               are
               too
               light
               or
               too
               deep
               for
               the
               Curtain
               behind
               ,
               and
               the
               Linnen
               and
               Drapery
               may
               somewhat
               alter
               the
               propertie
               to
               the
               eye
               ,
               and
               make
               the
               Picture
               appear
               otherwise
               than
               it
               did
               when
               there
               was
               only
               the
               colour
               of
               the
               Parchment
               about
               it
               ;
               I
               say
               ,
               view
               your
               object
               well
               ,
               and
               endeavour
               to
               reduce
               each
               Shadow
               to
               its
               due
               perfection
               :
               then
               draw
               the
               lines
               of
               the
               Eye-lids
               ,
               and
               shadow
               the
               entrance
               into
               the
               Ear
               ,
               the
               deepness
               of
               the
               Eye-browes
               ,
               and
               those
               more
               eminent
               notes
               and
               
               marks
               in
               the
               Face
               ,
               and
               these
               must
               be
               done
               with
               a
               very
               curious
               and
               sharp
               Pencil
               .
            
             
               The
               Face
               done
               thus
               far
               ,
               go
               over
               the
               Hair
               ,
               heightning
               or
               deepning
               it
               as
               it
               appears
               in
               the
               life
               ,
               casting
               over
               the
               ground
               some
               loose
               hairs
               ,
               which
               will
               be
               pleasing
               ,
               and
               make
               the
               Picture
               stand
               as
               it
               were
               at
               a
               distance
               from
               the
               Curtain
               .
            
             
               To
               shadow
               your
               Linnen
               ,
               use
               Black
               ,
               White
               ,
               a
               little
               Yellow
               ,
               and
               less
               Blew
               ;
               the
               Black
               must
               be
               deepned
               with
               lvory-black
               ,
               with
               which
               mix
               a
               little
               Lake
               and
               Indico
               .
               And
               thus
               far
               have
               we
               proceeded
               at
               the
               second
               operation
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               III.
               
                 At
                 the
                 third
                 Operation
                 ,
                 or
                 Sitting
                 .
              
            
             
               THe
               third
               and
               last
               operation
               of
               the
               Face
               will
               be
               wholly
               spent
               in
               giving
               of
               strong
               touches
               where
               you
               see
               cause
               ;
               and
               in
               observations
               necessary
               for
               the
               rounding
               of
               the
               Face
               ,
               which
               will
               better
               be
               seen
               how
               to
               perform
               now
               ,
               than
               before
               the
               Curtain
               ,
               Drapery
               ,
               and
               Linnen
               were
               laid
               .
               In
               this
               last
               sitting
               observe
               very
               diligently
               and
               exactly
               whatever
               may
               conduce
               to
               similitude
               ,
               which
               is
               a
               main
               thing
               ,
               as
               Scars
               or
               Moles
               in
               the
               Face
               ,
               &c.
               casts
               of
               the
               Eye
               ,
               circumflexions
               or
               windings
               of
               the
               mouth
               .
               Thus
               much
               for
               the
               third
               operation
               and
               finishing
               of
               the
               Face
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             V.
             
          
           
             Of
             Drapery
             ,
             and
             other
             ornaments
             belonging
             to
             a
             Picture
             in
             Miniture
             .
          
           
             THE
             Face
             being
             compleatly
             finished
             ,
             and
             the
             Apparel
             rudely
             put
             on
             ,
             let
             us
             now
             come
             to
             shew
             how
             to
             settle
             them
             in
             their
             right
             geers
             ,
             (
             as
             the
             saying
             is
             ,
             )
             as
             also
             to
             put
             on
             such
             Ornaments
             as
             are
             usual
             in
             Pictures
             of
             this
             nature
             .
             And
             these
             shall
             be
             expressed
             in
             the
             Sections
             following
             .
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               I.
               
                 Of
                 Drapery
                 in
                 Limning
              
               .
            
             
               HAving
               laid
               a
               good
               ,
               fat
               ,
               and
               full
               Ground
               all
               over
               the
               Drapery
               you
               intend
               to
               make
               ;
               if
               Blew
               ,
               then
               all
               over
               with
               Bise
               smoothly
               laid
               :
               the
               deepning
               must
               be
               Lake
               and
               Indico
               ,
               the
               lightning
               White
               ,
               very
               fine
               ,
               faint
               ,
               and
               fair
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               extreme
               light
               places
               .
               What
               hath
               been
               said
               of
               this
               
                 Blew
                 Drapery
              
               ,
               the
               like
               is
               to
               be
               understood
               of
               all
               other
               Colours
               .
            
             
               It
               is
               rare
               to
               see
               Drapery
               expressed
               by
               lightning
               of
               of
               it
               with
               fine
               shell-Gold
               ,
               with
               which
               it
               must
               be
               hatched
               and
               washed
               ,
               what
               a
               lustre
               it
               gives
               to
               well-coloured
               Drapery
               ,
               either
               Crimson
               ,
               Green
               ,
               or
               Blew
               ,
               but
               much
               more
               if
               with
               the
               Ground
               it self
               you
               mix
               Gold
               when
               you
               lay
               it
               on
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               SECT
               .
               II.
               
                 Of
                 other
                 Ornaments
                 in
                 Picture
              
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               IF
               the
               Body
               you
               are
               to
               draw
               be
               in
               Armor
               ,
               lay
               liquid
               Silver
               all
               over
               for
               your
               ground
               ,
               well
               dryed
               and
               burnished
               ,
               shadow
               it
               with
               Silver
               ,
               Indico
               ,
               and
               Umber
               ;
               work
               these
               shadows
               upon
               the
               Silver
               as
               the
               life
               directs
               you
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               For
               Gold
               Armor
               ,
               lay
               liquid
               Gold
               as
               you
               did
               the
               Silver
               ,
               and
               shadow
               upon
               it
               with
               Lake
               ,
               English-Oker
               ,
               and
               a
               little
               Gold.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               For
               Pearls
               ,
               your
               ground
               must
               be
               Indico
               and
               White
               ;
               your
               shadows
               Black
               and
               Pink.
               
            
             
               4.
               
               For
               Diamonds
               ,
               lay
               a
               ground
               of
               liquid
               Silver
               ,
               deepen
               it
               with
               Cherrystone
               and
               Ivory-black
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             VI.
             
          
           
             Of
             LANDSKIP
             .
          
           
             THE
             bounds
             and
             limits
             of
             Landskip
             are
             inexpressible
             ,
             they
             being
             as
             various
             as
             fancy
             is
             copious
             ;
             I
             will
             give
             you
             only
             some
             general
             Rules
             for
             painting
             of
             Landskip
             ,
             and
             so
             conclude
             this
             third
             Book
             .
          
           
             In
             painting
             of
             any
             Landskip
             alwayes
             begin
             with
             the
             Sky
             ,
             the
             Sun-beams
             ,
             or
             lightest
             parts
             first
             ;
             next
             the
             Yellow
             beams
             ,
             which
             compose
             of
             Masticote
             and
             White
             ;
             next
             your
             Blew
             skies
             ,
             with
             Smalt
             only
             .
             At
             your
             first
             colouring
             leave
             no
             part
             of
             your
             
             ground
             uncovered
             ,
             but
             lay
             your
             Colours
             smooth
             and
             even
             all
             over
             .
             Work
             your
             Sky
             downwards
             towards
             your
             Horizon
             fainter
             and
             fainter
             ,
             as
             it
             draws
             nearer
             and
             nearer
             to
             the
             earth
             ,
             you
             must
             work
             your
             tops
             of
             Mountains
             and
             objects
             far
             remote
             ,
             so
             faint
             that
             they
             may
             appear
             as
             lost
             in
             the
             Air
             :
             Your
             lowest
             and
             nearest
             Ground
             must
             be
             of
             the
             colour
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             of
             a
             dark
             yellowish
             brown
             Green
             ,
             the
             next
             lighter
             Green
             ,
             and
             so
             successively
             as
             they
             lose
             in
             their
             distance
             they
             must
             abate
             in
             their
             colour
             .
             Make
             nothing
             that
             you
             see
             at
             a
             distance
             perfect
             ;
             as
             if
             discerning
             a
             Building
             to
             be
             fourteen
             or
             fifteen
             miles
             off
             ,
             I
             know
             not
             Church
             ,
             Castle
             ,
             House
             ,
             or
             the
             like
             ;
             so
             that
             in
             drawing
             of
             it
             you
             must
             express
             no
             particular
             sign
             ,
             as
             Bell
             ,
             Portcullis
             ,
             or
             the
             like
             ;
             but
             express
             it
             in
             colours
             as
             weakly
             and
             faintly
             as
             your
             eye
             judgeth
             of
             it
             .
             Ever
             in
             your
             Landskip
             place
             light
             against
             dark
             ,
             and
             dark
             against
             light
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             only
             way
             to
             extend
             the
             prospect
             far
             off
             ,
             occasioned
             by
             opposing
             light
             to
             shadow
             ;
             yet
             so
             as
             the
             shadows
             must
             lose
             their
             force
             in
             proportion
             as
             they
             remove
             from
             the
             eye
             ,
             and
             the
             strongest
             shadow
             must
             alwayes
             be
             nearest
             hand
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           OF
           PAINTING
           in
           OYL
           .
           The
           Fourth
           Book
           .
        
         
           
             PAinting
             in
             Oyl
          
           is
           of
           most
           esteem
           of
           any
           other
           Painting
           ,
           and
           indeed
           it
           requireth
           the
           greatest
           judgement
           in
           the
           performance
           ,
           of
           any
           other
           kind
           of
           Painting
           .
           I
           shall
           (
           according
           to
           the
           weakness
           of
           my
           ability
           )
           deliver
           unto
           you
           such
           Rules
           and
           directions
           ,
           as
           being
           well
           minded
           and
           practised
           ,
           may
           in
           a
           short
           time
           make
           you
           a
           good
           proficient
           therein
           :
           Presupposing
           you
           have
           read
           the
           three
           foregoing
           Books
           ,
           especially
           the
           First
           and
           Third
           ,
           and
           that
           you
           understand
           Draught
           of
           any
           kind
           ,
           and
           also
           the
           nature
           (
           if
           not
           the
           manner
           of
           working
           with
           )
           Water-colours
           ,
           yet
           at
           least
           have
           read
           the
           Rules
           there
           delivered
           concerning
           the
           use
           of
           them
           ,
           you
           may
           fall
           to
           practise
           the
           Painting
           in
           Oyl
           ;
           in
           which
           observe
           the
           directions
           following
           .
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             I.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             Names
             of
             your
             Colours
             ,
             and
             how
             to
             Grind
             and
             order
             them
             .
          
           
             
               
                 Names
                 of
                 the
                 Colours
                 in
                 Oyl
                 .
              
               
                 BLACKS
                 .
                 
                   
                     Lamp-black
                     .
                  
                   
                     Seacoal-black
                     .
                  
                   
                     Ivory-black
                     .
                  
                   
                     Charcoal-black
                     .
                  
                   
                     Earth
                     of
                     Colen
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 WHITES
                 .
                 
                   
                     White-Lead
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 GREENS
                 .
                 
                   
                     Verdigrease
                     .
                  
                   
                     Terra
                     vert
                     .
                  
                   
                     Verditer
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 BLEWS
                 .
                 
                   
                     Rise
                  
                   
                     Indico
                     .
                  
                   
                     Smalt
                     .
                  
                   
                     Vltamarine
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 REDS.
                 
                 
                   
                     Vermilion
                     .
                  
                   
                     Red-Lead
                     .
                  
                   
                     Lake
                     .
                  
                   
                     India
                     Red.
                     
                  
                   
                     Ornotto
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 YELLOWS
                 .
                 
                   
                     Pink.
                     
                  
                   
                     Masticote
                     .
                  
                   
                     English
                     Oker
                     .
                  
                   
                     Orpiment
                     .
                  
                   
                     Spruse
                     Oker
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 Spanish
                 Brown
                 ,
                 Burnt
                 Spruse
                 ,
                 Vmber
                 .
              
            
          
           
             These
             are
             the
             chief
             Colours
             that
             are
             used
             in
             Painting
             in
             Oyl
             ,
             the
             most
             part
             of
             which
             are
             to
             be
             grownd
             very
             fine
             upon
             your
             Stone
             with
             a
             Muller
             ,
             with
             Linseed-Oyl
             :
             some
             must
             be
             Burnt
             before
             they
             be
             Grownd
             ;
             others
             must
             be
             only
             temper'd
             upon
             the
             Pallat
             ,
             and
             not
             grownd
             at
             all
             .
          
           
             The
             Colours
             to
             be
             burnt
             are
             these
             :
             
               Ivory
               ,
               Spruse
               ,
               Oker
            
             ,
             and
             Vmber
             .
          
           
           
             The
             Colours
             that
             are
             not
             to
             be
             Grownd
             at
             all
             ,
             but
             only
             tempered
             with
             Oyl
             upon
             your
             Pallat
             ,
             are
             these
             :
          
           
             
               Lamp-black
               ,
               Verditer
               ,
               Vermilion
               ,
               Bise
               ,
               Smalt
               ,
               Masticote
               ,
               Orpiment
               ,
               Vltamarine
               .
            
          
           
             All
             the
             rest
             are
             to
             be
             Grownd
             upon
             your
             Stone
             with
             Linseed-Oyl
             ;
             only
             White-Lead
             ,
             when
             you
             are
             to
             use
             that
             for
             Linnen
             ,
             you
             must
             grind
             it
             with
             Oyl
             of
             Walnuts
             ,
             for
             Linseed-Oyl
             will
             make
             it
             turn
             yellow
             .
          
           
             Those
             Colours
             that
             are
             to
             be
             Burnt
             ,
             you
             must
             put
             them
             into
             a
             Crucible
             ,
             such
             as
             Gold-smiths
             melt
             their
             Silver
             in
             ,
             cover
             the
             mouth
             thereof
             with
             clay
             ,
             and
             there
             let
             it
             burn
             red
             hot
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             cold
             you
             must
             grind
             it
             upon
             your
             Stone
             with
             Oyl
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             II.
             
          
           
             Of
             your
             Easell
             ,
             Straining-frame
             ,
             Cloth
             ,
             Pallat
             ,
             Pencils
             ,
             and
             Stay.
             
          
           
             I
             Might
             here
             describe
             the
             form
             and
             fashion
             of
             your
             Easell
             and
             Pallat
             ,
             but
             I
             think
             I
             need
             not
             ;
             for
             he
             that
             ever
             saw
             a
             Painter
             at
             work
             ,
             must
             needs
             see
             these
             two
             Instruments
             ,
             but
             what
             they
             are
             I
             shall
             here
             describe
             .
          
           
             An
             Easell
             is
             a
             frame
             made
             of
             wood
             ,
             not
             much
             unlike
             a
             Ladder
             ,
             only
             the
             sides
             are
             flat
             ,
             and
             full
             of
             holes
             on
             either
             side
             ,
             to
             put
             in
             two
             pinns
             to
             set
             your
             Work
             upon
             higher
             or
             lower
             at
             pleasure
             ;
             it
             is
             broader
             at
             the
             bottom
             than
             at
             the
             top
             ,
             and
             on
             the
             
             back-side
             there
             is
             a
             Stay
             ,
             by
             the
             help
             of
             which
             you
             may
             set
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             any
             room
             ,
             more
             upright
             or
             sloping
             at
             pleasure
             ;
             when
             you
             do
             not
             use
             it
             ,
             you
             may
             clap
             it
             together
             and
             set
             it
             behind
             any
             door
             ,
             or
             hang
             it
             against
             any
             wall
             out
             of
             the
             way
             .
          
           
             A
             Pallat
             is
             a
             thin
             piece
             of
             wood
             ,
             and
             is
             necessary
             to
             be
             about
             twelve
             or
             fourteen
             inches
             long
             ,
             and
             nine
             or
             ten
             inches
             broad
             ,
             in
             form
             of
             an
             egge
             ,
             at
             the
             narrower
             end
             whereof
             is
             a
             hole
             made
             also
             of
             an
             oval
             form
             ,
             about
             an
             inch
             and
             a
             half
             in
             length
             ,
             and
             an
             inch
             broad
             ;
             this
             hole
             is
             to
             put
             in
             your
             thumb
             of
             your
             left
             hand
             ,
             upon
             which
             you
             must
             alwayes
             hold
             it
             when
             you
             are
             at
             work
             ;
             out
             of
             the
             side
             of
             your
             Pallat
             neer
             unto
             the
             thumb-hole
             is
             cut
             a
             notch
             ,
             by
             the
             side
             of
             which
             the
             Pencils
             which
             you
             hold
             in
             your
             left
             hand
             also
             may
             come
             through
             ,
             by
             which
             means
             you
             may
             take
             any
             of
             them
             out
             ,
             or
             put
             another
             in
             at
             pleasure
             .
             These
             Pallats
             ought
             to
             be
             very
             thin
             and
             light
             ,
             especially
             at
             the
             broad
             end
             ,
             but
             toward
             the
             thumb-hole
             somewhat
             thick
             ,
             yet
             not
             above
             half
             a
             quarter
             of
             an
             inch
             ;
             the
             best
             wood
             to
             make
             them
             of
             is
             Pear-tree
             of
             Walnut-tree
             .
          
           
             A
             Straining-frame
             is
             nothing
             else
             but
             a
             frame
             made
             of
             wood
             ;
             to
             which
             with
             nails
             you
             must
             fasten
             your
             Cloth
             that
             you
             are
             to
             paint
             upon
             ;
             of
             these
             Frames
             you
             should
             have
             of
             several
             sizes
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             bigness
             of
             your
             Cloths
             .
          
           
             By
             your
             Cloth
             I
             mean
             
               Cloth
               primed
            
             ,
             I
             could
             teach
             you
             how
             to
             prime
             it
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             a
             moiling
             work
             ,
             and
             besides
             ,
             it
             may
             be
             bought
             ready
             primed
             cheaper
             and
             better
             than
             you
             can
             do
             it
             your self
             .
             Few
             Painters
             (
             though
             all
             can
             do
             it
             )
             prime
             it
             themselves
             ,
             but
             buy
             it
             ready
             done
             .
          
           
           
             Pencils
             ,
             what
             they
             are
             I
             need
             not
             tell
             you
             ,
             but
             what
             sorts
             there
             are
             I
             will
             ,
             because
             I
             shall
             have
             occasion
             to
             call
             them
             sometimes
             by
             their
             names
             in
             the
             Discourse
             following
             .
             There
             are
             of
             all
             bignesses
             ,
             from
             a
             pin
             to
             the
             beginess
             of
             your
             finger
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             several
             sorts
             ,
             thus
             called
             :
             
               
                 Ducks
                 Quill
                 fitched
                 .
              
               
                 Ducks
                 Quill
                 pointed
                 .
              
               
                 —
                 Bristle
                 .
              
               
                 Swans
                 Quill
                 fitched
                 .
              
               
                 Swans
                 Quill
                 pointed
                 .
              
               
                 —
                 Bristle
                 .
              
               
                 Hairing
                 ,
                 or
                 Jewelling-Pencils
                 .
              
               
                 Goose
                 Quill
                 fitched
                 .
              
               
                 Goose
                 Quill
                 pointed
                 .
              
               
                 —
                 Bristle
                 .
              
               
                 Bristle
                 Pencils
                 ;
                 some
                 in
                 Quills
                 ,
                 others
                 in
                 Tinn-cases
                 ▪
                 bigger
                 than
                 Quills
                 ,
                 and
                 others
                 in
                 Sticks
                 .
              
            
          
           
             Your
             Stay
             or
             Mol-stick
             is
             nothing
             else
             but
             a
             stick
             of
             Brazeel
             or
             such
             like
             wood
             that
             will
             not
             easily
             bend
             ,
             about
             a
             yard
             in
             length
             ,
             at
             one
             end
             whereof
             tie
             a
             little
             ball
             of
             Cotton
             hard
             in
             a
             piece
             of
             Leather
             about
             the
             bigness
             of
             a
             Chesnut
             ;
             this
             stick
             when
             you
             are
             at
             work
             you
             must
             hold
             also
             in
             your
             left
             hand
             ,
             and
             laying
             the
             end
             which
             hath
             the
             leather
             ball
             upon
             your
             cloth
             or
             frame
             ,
             you
             may
             rest
             your
             right
             arm
             upon
             it
             all
             the
             while
             you
             are
             at
             work
             .
             Thus
             being
             furnished
             with
             all
             manner
             of
             Colours
             ,
             and
             other
             necessaries
             here
             described
             ,
             you
             may
             begin
             to
             practise
             when
             you
             please
             ;
             we
             will
             begin
             with
             a
             Face
             ,
             in
             which
             observe
             the
             directions
             in
             the
             following
             Chapters
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             III.
             
          
           
             How
             to
             order
             your
             Colours
             upon
             your
             Pallat
             ,
             and
             how
             to
             temper
             Shadows
             for
             all
             Complexions
             .
          
           
             DIspose
             your
             single
             Colours
             upon
             your
             Pallat
             in
             this
             order
             ,
             laying
             them
             at
             a
             convenient
             distance
             one
             from
             another
             ,
             so
             that
             they
             be
             not
             apt
             to
             intermix
             .
             First
             lay
             on
             your
             Vermilion
             ,
             then
             Lake
             ,
             then
             burnt
             Oker
             ,
             India
             Red
             ,
             Pink
             ,
             Umber
             ,
             Blacks
             ,
             and
             Smalt
             :
             lay
             the
             White
             next
             to
             your
             thumb
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             oftnest
             used
             ,
             for
             with
             it
             you
             lighten
             all
             your
             Shadows
             ;
             next
             to
             your
             White
             lay
             a
             stiff
             sort
             of
             Lake
             :
             this
             done
             your
             Pallat
             is
             furnished
             with
             the
             single
             Colours
             belonging
             to
             a
             Face
             ;
             then
             for
             the
             tempering
             of
             your
             Shadows
             to
             all
             Complexions
             ,
             observe
             the
             following
             Directions
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               
                 For
                 a
                 Fair
                 Complexion
              
               .
            
             
               Take
               a
               little
               White
               ,
               and
               twice
               as
               much
               Vermilion
               ,
               and
               as
               much
               Lake
               ,
               temper
               these
               well
               together
               upon
               your
               Pallat
               with
               the
               flat
               blade
               of
               your
               knife
               ;
               lay
               aside
               by
               it self
               on
               your
               Pallat
               the
               greatest
               quantity
               of
               this
               to
               be
               used
               for
               the
               deepest
               Carnation
               of
               the
               Face
               .
            
             
               Put
               more
               White
               to
               that
               which
               remains
               ,
               and
               temper
               that
               well
               with
               your
               knife
               ,
               and
               being
               well
               tempered
               lay
               some
               of
               that
               aside
               also
               for
               your
               lighter
               Carnation
               .
            
             
             
               To
               the
               remainder
               add
               yet
               more
               White
               ,
               and
               temper
               it
               upon
               your
               Pallat
               till
               you
               have
               brought
               it
               to
               the
               lightest
               colour
               of
               your
               Face
               .
            
             
               Your
               Carnations
               being
               thus
               tempered
               ,
               and
               orderly
               laid
               upon
               your
               Pallat
               ,
               prepare
               your
               faint
               Shadows
               .
               For
               which
               ,
            
             
               Take
               Smalt
               ,
               and
               mix
               it
               with
               a
               little
               White
               ,
               which
               may
               serve
               for
               the
               Eyes
               ;
               lay
               aside
               the
               greatest
               quantity
               ,
               and
               to
               the
               rest
               add
               a
               little
               Pink
               ,
               this
               well
               tempered
               and
               laid
               by
               it self
               will
               serve
               for
               the
               faint
               greenish
               shadows
               in
               the
               Face
               .
            
             
               Now
               prepare
               your
               deep
               Shadows
               ;
               for
               which
               take
               Lake
               ,
               Pink
               ,
               and
               Black
               ,
               of
               each
               a
               like
               quantity
               ,
               temper
               all
               these
               together
               .
            
             
               If
               the
               parties
               Face
               you
               are
               to
               draw
               ,
               or
               the
               Picture
               you
               are
               to
               copie
               do
               require
               the
               Shadows
               to
               be
               redder
               than
               what
               you
               have
               tempered
               ,
               then
               add
               a
               little
               more
               Lake
               ;
               if
               yellower
               ,
               add
               a
               little
               more
               Pink
               ;
               if
               blewer
               or
               grayer
               ,
               add
               a
               little
               more
               Black.
               
            
             
               This
               done
               ,
               your
               Pallat
               is
               prepared
               with
               Colours
               for
               any
               fair
               Face
               .
            
          
           
             
               2.
               
               
                 For
                 a
                 more
                 Brown
                 or
                 Swarthy
                 Complexion
                 .
              
            
             
               Lay
               your
               single
               Colours
               on
               your
               Pallat
               as
               before
               ,
               and
               in
               like
               manner
               temper
               them
               ,
               only
               amongst
               your
               White
               ,
               Lake
               ,
               and
               Vermilion
               ,
               put
               a
               little
               quantity
               of
               burnt
               Oker
               ,
               to
               make
               it
               look
               somewhat
               Tawny
               .
            
             
               Amongst
               your
               heightnings
               temper
               a
               little
               yellow
               Oker
               ,
               onely
               so
               much
               as
               may
               just
               turn
               the
               Colours
               .
            
             
             
               For
               your
               very
               faint
               and
               very
               deep
               Shadows
               ;
               the
               same
               as
               before
               .
            
          
           
             
               3.
               
               
                 For
                 a
                 Tawny
                 Complexion
              
               .
            
             
               The
               general
               Colours
               must
               be
               the
               same
               as
               before
               ,
               only
               the
               Shadows
               are
               different
               ,
               for
               you
               are
               to
               prepare
               them
               of
               Umber
               ,
               and
               burnt
               Oker
               ,
               which
               shadow
               will
               fit
               these
               Complexions
               best
               ;
               if
               the
               shadow
               be
               not
               Yellow
               enough
               ,
               add
               more
               Pink
               to
               it
               .
            
          
           
             
               4.
               
               
                 For
                 an
                 absolute
                 Black
                 Complexion
              
               .
            
             
               Your
               dark
               Shadows
               must
               be
               the
               same
               as
               before
               ;
               but
               for
               your
               heightnings
               ,
               you
               must
               take
               White
               ,
               burnt
               Oker
               ,
               Lake
               ,
               and
               Black
               ,
               put
               but
               a
               little
               White
               in
               at
               first
               ,
               but
               work
               it
               up
               by
               degrees
               ,
               till
               you
               come
               to
               the
               lightest
               of
               all
               ,
               as
               you
               did
               the
               contrary
               Colours
               for
               a
               fair
               Complexion
               .
            
             
               Here
               note
               ,
               that
               the
               single
               Colours
               at
               first
               laid
               upon
               your
               Pallat
               being
               tempered
               together
               according
               to
               the
               former
               directions
               ,
               serve
               for
               shadows
               for
               all
               Complexions
               .
            
             
               Thus
               much
               concerning
               the
               disposing
               and
               ordering
               of
               your
               Pencils
               ,
               and
               what
               Pencils
               you
               are
               alwayes
               to
               have
               in
               your
               hand
               all
               the
               while
               you
               are
               painting
               of
               a
               Face
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             IV.
             
          
           
             What
             Pencils
             are
             usefull
             for
             the
             Painting
             of
             a
             Face
             ,
             and
             how
             to
             dispose
             them
             .
          
           
             EVery
             Pencil
             must
             have
             a
             stick
             of
             about
             nine
             inches
             long
             put
             into
             the
             Quill
             thereof
             ,
             the
             farther
             end
             of
             which
             stick
             must
             be
             cut
             to
             a
             point
             .
          
           
             When
             you
             are
             to
             begin
             any
             Face
             or
             other
             picture
             ,
             lay
             together
             two
             Ducks
             quill-fitch-Pencils
             ,
             and
             two
             Ducks-quill-pointed-Pencils
             ,
             also
             two
             Goose-quill
             fitched
             and
             two
             pointed
             ,
             two
             Bristles
             both
             alike
             ;
             one
             Swans-quill
             fitched
             ,
             and
             another
             pointed
             ;
             then
             a
             larger
             Pencil
             than
             any
             of
             these
             ,
             which
             no
             Quill
             will
             hold
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             make
             cases
             of
             Tinn
             to
             put
             them
             in
             ,
             you
             must
             have
             one
             of
             these
             Fitched
             ,
             as
             also
             a
             Bristle
             of
             the
             same
             bigness
             .
          
           
             Your
             Pencils
             being
             in
             a
             readiness
             ,
             when
             you
             are
             to
             use
             them
             ,
             your
             Pallat
             being
             upon
             your
             thumb
             ,
             you
             must
             take
             your
             Pencils
             in
             your
             right
             hand
             ,
             and
             put
             the
             ends
             of
             their
             sticks
             into
             your
             left
             hand
             ,
             keeping
             (
             when
             you
             work
             )
             the
             hairy
             ends
             at
             a
             distance
             ,
             one
             from
             touching
             another
             ,
             lest
             the
             Colours
             in
             them
             intermingle
             .
          
           
             Your
             Pallat
             of
             Colours
             being
             prepared
             ,
             and
             your
             Pencils
             and
             Molstick
             also
             in
             a
             readiness
             ,
             you
             are
             to
             use
             them
             as
             is
             hereafter
             taught
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             V.
             
          
           
             How
             to
             Paint
             a
             FACE
             in
             Oyl-Colours
             .
          
           
             YOur
             Cloth
             being
             ready
             primed
             ,
             and
             strained
             upon
             your
             Frame
             ,
             take
             a
             knife
             ,
             and
             with
             the
             edge
             thereof
             scrape
             over
             your
             Cloth
             ,
             lest
             any
             knots
             or
             the
             like
             should
             be
             upon
             it
             which
             may
             disryme
             your
             Work.
             
          
           
             Your
             Cloth
             being
             ready
             ,
             draw
             forth
             your
             Easell
             ,
             setting
             your
             Frame
             &
             Cloth
             upon
             it
             at
             a
             convenient
             height
             ,
             so
             that
             you
             sitting
             upon
             a
             stool
             ,
             (
             level
             with
             the
             party
             you
             draw
             )
             may
             have
             the
             face
             of
             the
             picture
             equal
             ,
             or
             somewhat
             higher
             than
             your
             own
             .
             Then
             set
             your
             Easell
             according
             to
             your
             light
             ,
             which
             let
             be
             the
             same
             as
             I
             have
             described
             in
             Limning
             ,
             namely
             ,
             a
             Northerly
             light
             ,
             free
             from
             shade
             of
             trees
             or
             houses
             ,
             but
             let
             it
             come
             in
             on
             your
             left
             hand
             ,
             and
             so
             cast
             the
             light
             towards
             the
             right
             hand
             .
          
           
             All
             things
             being
             now
             in
             a
             readiness
             ,
             let
             the
             party
             you
             are
             to
             draw
             sit
             before
             you
             in
             the
             Posture
             he
             intends
             to
             be
             painted
             ,
             about
             two
             yards
             distant
             from
             you
             .
          
           
             Then
             with
             a
             piece
             of
             Chalk
             pointed
             ,
             draw
             the
             proportion
             of
             the
             Face
             upon
             the
             Cloth
             ,
             with
             the
             place
             of
             the
             Eyes
             ,
             Nose
             ,
             Mouth
             ,
             Ears
             ,
             Hair
             ,
             and
             whatsoever
             the
             posture
             affordeth
             the
             Eye
             ;
             here
             is
             no
             curiosity
             in
             this
             ,
             only
             see
             that
             you
             keep
             a
             good
             decorum
             ,
             if
             you
             miss
             a
             good
             deal
             ,
             the
             Colours
             will
             bring
             all
             to
             rights
             ;
             but
             I
             suppose
             you
             know
             already
             
             whether
             the
             design
             will
             make
             a
             Face
             proportionable
             to
             the
             parties
             .
             And
             so
             of
             that
             no
             more
             .
          
           
             Your
             Design
             being
             drawn
             in
             Chalk
             ,
             take
             one
             of
             your
             Swans-quill-pointed-Pencils
             ,
             and
             some
             of
             your
             lightest
             Colour
             ,
             and
             begin
             with
             the
             lightest
             parts
             in
             the
             Face
             ,
             as
             the
             
               heightning
               of
               the
               Forehead
            
             ,
             the
             Nose
             ,
             and
             the
             Cheek-bone
             of
             the
             lightest
             side
             :
             when
             you
             have
             done
             the
             lightest
             parts
             ,
             do
             the
             mean
             parts
             next
             ;
             that
             is
             ,
             those
             parts
             not
             altogether
             so
             light
             as
             the
             other
             ,
             as
             the
             Cheek-bone
             of
             the
             fore-shortning
             or
             dark
             side
             ,
             the
             Chin
             ,
             and
             
               over
               the
               upper
               Lip
            
             ;
             and
             so
             proceed
             gradually
             till
             you
             come
             to
             the
             Reddest
             parts
             of
             all
             .
          
           
             Then
             lay
             your
             faint
             Greenish
             shadows
             in
             convenient
             places
             ,
             and
             where
             you
             see
             cause
             to
             moderate
             harder
             shadows
             ;
             but
             you
             must
             have
             a
             care
             you
             put
             not
             Green
             shadows
             where
             Red
             are
             required
             .
          
           
             Thus
             all
             your
             faint
             or
             light
             beginnings
             being
             put
             in
             ,
             take
             one
             of
             your
             Goose-quill-pointed-Pencils
             ,
             or
             one
             of
             your
             Ducks-quill-fitched
             ,
             and
             begin
             at
             the
             Eyes
             to
             shadow
             with
             Lake
             ,
             because
             you
             may
             easily
             overcome
             it
             if
             it
             should
             chance
             to
             be
             wrong
             :
             I
             do
             not
             mean
             you
             should
             go
             all
             over
             the
             face
             with
             Lake
             ,
             but
             trace
             out
             these
             parts
             of
             the
             Face
             therewith
             ,
             as
             the
             
               Eyes
               ,
               Nose
               ,
               Mouth
               ,
               Compass
               of
               the
               Ear
               ,
            
             &c.
             
             This
             tricking
             or
             tracing
             out
             of
             these
             parts
             with
             Lake
             is
             to
             be
             done
             before
             you
             lay
             on
             any
             Colour
             ,
             wipping
             it
             lightly
             over
             with
             a
             linnen
             rag
             ,
             to
             prevent
             the
             overcoming
             of
             the
             other
             Colours
             .
          
           
             Having
             thus
             put
             in
             all
             your
             Colours
             both
             light
             and
             dark
             ,
             take
             a
             great
             Fitch-pencil
             ,
             either
             that
             in
             the
             plate
             ,
             or
             that
             in
             the
             stick
             ,
             and
             sweeten
             the
             Colours
             
             therewith
             ;
             by
             sweetning
             ,
             is
             meant
             the
             going
             over
             these
             several
             Shadows
             thus
             laid
             with
             a
             clean
             soft
             Pencil
             ,
             which
             with
             orderly
             handling
             will
             drive
             and
             intermix
             the
             Colours
             one
             into
             another
             ,
             that
             they
             will
             appear
             as
             if
             they
             were
             all
             laid
             on
             at
             once
             ,
             and
             not
             at
             several
             times
             .
             If
             this
             great
             fitch'd
             Pencil
             be
             too
             big
             ,
             you
             may
             use
             a
             lesser
             ;
             but
             note
             ,
             that
             the
             bigger
             Pencils
             you
             use
             ,
             the
             sweeter
             and
             better
             your
             Work
             will
             lie
             ;
             and
             it
             is
             as
             easie
             to
             handle
             a
             great
             Pencil
             as
             a
             little
             one
             ,
             if
             you
             use
             your self
             to
             it
             .
          
           
             At
             your
             Second
             sitting
             (
             for
             this
             is
             enough
             at
             once
             )
             begin
             again
             with
             your
             clean
             Pencils
             of
             such
             bigness
             as
             the
             piece
             you
             are
             to
             work
             upon
             does
             require
             .
             Then
             the
             party
             sitting
             in
             the
             same
             position
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             same
             distance
             as
             before
             ,
             the
             light
             also
             being
             the
             same
             ,
             Observe
             well
             the
             party
             ,
             and
             see
             what
             defects
             you
             find
             in
             the
             Work
             at
             your
             first
             sitting
             ,
             and
             amend
             them
             ;
             then
             heighten
             or
             deepen
             your
             Shadows
             according
             as
             you
             see
             occasion
             .
          
           
             This
             done
             ,
             take
             a
             Goose-quill
             Bristle
             and
             put
             in
             the
             Hair
             about
             the
             Face
             ,
             and
             rub
             in
             the
             greater
             Hair
             with
             the
             greater
             Bristle
             ,
             and
             heighten
             it
             up
             with
             your
             Goose-quill
             Pencil
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             VI.
             
          
           
             Of
             Garments
             of
             several
             colours
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             proper
             Colouring
             .
          
           
             THE
             next
             thing
             I
             shall
             speak
             of
             ,
             shall
             be
             of
             Drapery
             of
             Garments
             ,
             and
             the
             true
             and
             proper
             manner
             of
             Colouring
             of
             them
             .
             And
          
           
             
               1.
               
               
                 For
                 a
                 Red
                 Garment
              
               .
            
             
               For
               a
               light-red
               Garment
               ,
               first
               dead-colour
               it
               with
               Vermilion
               ,
               and
               when
               you
               would
               finish
               it
               ,
               glaze
               it
               over
               with
               Lake
               ,
               and
               heighten
               it
               with
               White
               .
            
             
               
                 For
                 a
                 Scarlet
                 .
              
               If
               you
               will
               have
               your
               Garment
               Scarlet
               ,
               Vermilion
               it self
               must
               be
               the
               lightest
               ,
               and
               it
               must
               be
               deepned
               with
               Lake
               or
               India
               Red.
               
            
             
               
                 For
                 a
                 Crimson
                 Velvet
                 .
              
               Lay
               Vermilion
               ,
               burnt
               Oker
               ,
               or
               India
               Red
               ,
               for
               the
               dead
               colour
               ,
               glaze
               it
               with
               Lake
               ,
               and
               touch
               it
               up
               with
               Vermilion
               .
            
             
               
                 A
                 sad
                 Red.
                 
              
               Indian
               Red
               heightned
               with
               White
               .
            
             
               Note
               ,
               that
               all
               your
               deepnings
               should
               or
               ought
               to
               be
               deepned
               with
               Black
               ,
               Pink
               ,
               and
               Lake
               ,
               tempered
               together
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               2.
               
               For
               Green
               Garments
               .
            
             
               The
               best
               Green
               for
               holding
               is
               Bise
               and
               Pink
               ,
               heighten
               it
               with
               Masticote
               ,
               and
               deepen
               it
               with
               Indico
               and
               Pink.
               
            
             
               
                 For
                 Green
                 Velvet
                 .
              
               Lay
               the
               dead
               colour
               of
               White
               with
               a
               little
               Lamp-black
               ,
               glaze
               it
               with
               Verdigrease
               ,
               deepen
               it
               with
               Indico
               and
               Pink
               ,
               and
               heighten
               it
               with
               Pink
               and
               White
               .
            
          
           
             
               3.
               
               For
               Blew
               Garments
               .
            
             
               Take
               Indico
               and
               White
               ,
               first
               lay
               the
               White
               in
               its
               due
               places
               ,
               and
               then
               your
               mean
               colour
               ,
               namely
               Indico
               and
               White
               mixed
               in
               their
               due
               places
               ,
               then
               deepen
               it
               with
               Indico
               only
               ,
               and
               when
               it
               is
               dry
               glaze
               it
               with
               Ultamarine
               ,
               which
               will
               never
               fade
               ;
               you
               may
               glaze
               it
               with
               Smalt
               or
               Bise
               ;
               but
               Smalt
               will
               turn
               Black
               ,
               and
               Bise
               will
               turn
               Green.
               
            
             
               But
               if
               you
               will
               have
               a
               Blew
               Garment
               without
               glazing
               ,
               lay
               the
               ground
               as
               before
               ,
               with
               Indico
               and
               White
               ,
               heighten
               and
               deepen
               it
               with
               the
               same
               Colours
               .
            
          
           
             
               4.
               
               For
               Yellow
               Garments
               .
            
             
               For
               a
               Yellow
               Garment
               ,
               Masticote
               ,
               yellow
               Oker
               ,
               and
               Umber
               ;
               lay
               the
               dead
               colour
               of
               Masticote
               and
               White
               in
               the
               lightest
               places
               ,
               Oker
               and
               White
               in
               the
               mean
               places
               ,
               and
               Umber
               in
               the
               darkest
               places
               ;
               when
               it
               is
               dry
               glaze
               it
               with
               Pink.
               
            
             
               If
               you
               would
               not
               glaze
               it
               ,
               use
               only
               Masticote
               
               heightned
               with
               White
               ,
               and
               deepned
               in
               the
               mean
               shadows
               with
               Oker
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               deep
               shadows
               with
               Umber
               .
            
          
           
             
               5.
               
               For
               Black
               Garments
               .
            
             
               Let
               the
               dead
               colour
               be
               Lamp-black
               ,
               and
               some
               Verdigrease
               ;
               when
               that
               is
               dry
               ,
               go
               over
               it
               with
               Ivory-black
               and
               Verdigrease
               ;
               before
               you
               go
               over
               it
               the
               second
               time
               heighten
               it
               with
               White
               .
            
          
           
             
               6.
               
               For
               Purple
               Garments
               .
            
             
               Oyl
               Smalt
               ,
               tempered
               with
               Lake
               and
               White-Lead
               ,
               heighten
               it
               with
               White-Lead
               .
            
          
           
             
               7.
               
               Orange
               Colour
               .
            
             
               Red-Lead
               and
               Lake
               ,
               lay
               the
               lightest
               parts
               of
               all
               with
               Red-Lead
               and
               White
               ,
               the
               mean
               parts
               with
               Red-Lead
               alone
               ,
               the
               deeper
               parts
               with
               Lake
               ,
               if
               need
               require
               heighten
               it
               with
               White
               .
            
          
           
             
               8.
               
               Hair
               Colour
               .
            
             
               Umber
               and
               White
               for
               the
               ground
               ,
               Umber
               and
               Black
               for
               the
               deeper
               shadows
               ,
               Umber
               and
               English
               Oker
               for
               mean
               shadows
               ,
               for
               heightning
               White
               with
               a
               little
               English
               Oker
               .
            
             
             
             
             
             
             
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             VII
             .
          
           
             To
             temper
             Colours
             for
             several
             occasions
             .
          
           
             IN
             Landskip
             ,
             variety
             of
             Colours
             are
             required
             ;
             I
             will
             therefore
             begin
             with
             those
             first
             .
          
           
             
               Colours
               for
               the
               Skie
               .
            
             For
             the
             Aiery
             skie
             that
             seems
             a
             great
             way
             off
             ,
             take
             Oyl-Smalt
             or
             Bise
             ,
             and
             temper
             it
             with
             Linseed-Oyl
             ,
             for
             a
             Red
             sky
             use
             Lake
             and
             White
             ,
             and
             for
             Sun-beams
             or
             Yellow
             clouds
             appearing
             at
             Sun-rising
             or
             setting
             ,
             use
             Masticote
             and
             White
             ;
             for
             Clouds
             in
             a
             storm
             ,
             or
             for
             a
             Night-sky
             use
             Indico
             deepned
             with
             Black
             ,
             and
             heightned
             with
             White
             .
          
           
             
               Colours
               for
               Trees
               .
            
             For
             some
             use
             Lake
             ,
             Umber
             ,
             and
             White
             ;
             for
             others
             Charcoal
             and
             White
             ,
             for
             others
             Umber
             ,
             Black
             ,
             and
             White
             ,
             with
             some
             Green
             ,
             you
             may
             add
             Lake
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             Vermilion
             among
             your
             other
             Colours
             .
          
           
             
               Of
               several
               Greens
               in
               Landskip
               .
            
             For
             a
             light
             Green
             use
             Pink
             and
             Masticote
             heightned
             with
             White
             .
          
           
             For
             a
             sad
             Green
             ,
             Indico
             and
             Pink
             heightned
             with
             Masticote
             .
          
           
             You
             may
             make
             Greens
             of
             any
             degree
             whatsoever
             .
          
           
             In
             Painting
             of
             Landskip
             I
             shall
             say
             nothing
             here
             ,
             
             that
             which
             I
             have
             already
             said
             in
             the
             Sixth
             Chapter
             of
             the
             Book
             of
             Limning
             being
             sufficient
             .
          
           
             
               Things
               meet
               to
               be
               known
               .
            
             
               OYL-Colours
               if
               they
               be
               not
               used
               presently
               ,
               will
               have
               a
               skin
               grow
               over
               them
               ,
               and
               in
               time
               will
               quite
               dry
               up
               ;
               wherefore
               if
               you
               have
               any
               quantity
               of
               Colours
               grownd
               ,
               to
               keep
               them
               from
               skinning
               or
               drying
               ,
               set
               them
               in
               a
               vessel
               of
               fair
               water
               ,
               three
               or
               four
               inches
               under
               water
               ,
               and
               they
               will
               not
               skin
               nor
               dry
               .
            
             
               If
               your
               Grinding-stone
               be
               foul
               ,
               grind
               Curriers
               shavings
               upon
               it
               ,
               afterwards
               crumbs
               of
               bread
               ,
               and
               it
               will
               fetch
               off
               the
               filth
               .
            
             
               If
               your
               Pencils
               be
               foul
               ,
               dip
               the
               ends
               of
               them
               in
               Oyl
               of
               Turpentine
               ,
               and
               squeeze
               them
               between
               your
               fingers
               .
            
             
               When
               you
               work
               in
               Oyl
               ,
               let
               a
               little
               pot
               of
               Oyl
               stand
               by
               you
               ,
               into
               which
               dip
               your
               Pencil
               ,
               and
               streak
               it
               by
               the
               side
               of
               the
               pot
               ,
               and
               the
               Colour
               will
               go
               out
               that
               is
               within
               it
               ,
               and
               you
               may
               use
               it
               with
               another
               Colour
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             The
             Discovery
             .
          
           
             
               How
               to
               Cleanse
               any
               Old
               Painting
               ,
               so
               as
               to
               preserve
               the
               Colours
               ;
               with
               cautions
               to
               those
               that
               through
               ignorance
               have
               in
               stead
               of
               Cleansing
               ,
               quite
               Defaced
               or
               irrecoverably
               lost
               the
               Beauty
               of
               good
               colours
               in
               an
               Old
               piece
               of
               Painting
               .
            
          
           
             To
             Cleanse
             any
             old
             Picture
             in
             Oyl
             .
          
           
             TAke
             your
             purest
             white
             Wood-ashes
             you
             can
             get
             ,
             and
             sift
             them
             very
             well
             in
             a
             fine
             lawn
             sieve
             ;
             or
             else
             some
             Smalt
             ,
             which
             is
             as
             some
             call
             it
             Powder-blew
             ,
             and
             with
             a
             fine
             Spunge
             and
             fair
             water
             wash
             the
             Picture
             you
             intend
             gently
             over
             ,
             but
             be
             sure
             you
             have
             a
             great
             care
             of
             the
             Shadows
             ;
             for
             by
             the
             ignorance
             of
             many
             persons
             many
             good
             Picture
             hath
             been
             abused
             ;
             but
             having
             carefully
             wash'd
             it
             ,
             as
             before
             mentioned
             ,
             take
             some
             of
             these
             Vernishes
             ,
             of
             which
             there
             be
             several
             ,
             but
             some
             are
             more
             prejudicial
             than
             others
             ,
             therefore
             choose
             those
             which
             may
             upon
             occasion
             be
             wash'd
             off
             again
             .
          
           
             As
             Gum-water
             purely
             strain'd
             ,
             or
             pure
             Sizegelly
             ,
             or
             the
             whites
             of
             Eggs
             well
             beaten
             ;
             all
             these
             will
             wash
             off
             .
          
           
             Your
             common
             Vernish
             will
             vernish
             over
             any
             dark
             part
             of
             a
             Picture
             .
          
           
             But
             your
             distill'd
             Vernish
             is
             the
             best
             of
             all
             ;
             this
             will
             not
             wash
             off
             .
          
           
             But
             observe
             ,
             that
             when
             you
             have
             wash'd
             the
             Picture
             ,
             
             you
             must
             dry
             it
             very
             well
             with
             a
             clean
             cloth
             very
             dry
             before
             you
             vernish
             it
             .
          
           
             Divers
             there
             be
             which
             have
             pretended
             to
             be
             well
             skill'd
             or
             knowing
             in
             the
             Cleansing
             of
             Pictures
             ,
             and
             skill
             in
             Painting
             ,
             and
             have
             undertaken
             the
             spoyling
             of
             things
             they
             have
             been
             unworthy
             to
             understand
             ;
             as
             with
             Sope
             ,
             or
             Ashes
             ,
             and
             a
             Brush
             ,
             and
             divers
             other
             inventions
             ,
             by
             their
             ignorance
             to
             deface
             and
             spoyl
             those
             things
             which
             otherwise
             might
             have
             been
             worth
             great
             value
             ,
             and
             in
             stead
             of
             hindering
             the
             Painter
             of
             his
             employment
             ,
             have
             indeed
             created
             them
             new
             work
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           OF
           WASHING
           or
           COLOURING
           OF
           Maps
           ,
           and
           Printed
           Pictures
           .
           The
           Fifth
           Book
           .
        
         
           TO
           Wash
           Maps
           or
           
             Printed
             Pictures
          
           is
           nothing
           else
           but
           to
           set
           them
           out
           in
           their
           proper
           Colours
           ,
           which
           to
           perform
           well
           is
           a
           very
           fine
           thing
           .
           I
           have
           seen
           a
           Printed
           Picture
           printed
           upon
           fine
           Parchment
           ,
           only
           washed
           with
           Water-colours
           ,
           which
           could
           hardly
           be
           distinguished
           from
           a
           Limned
           piece
           ,
           and
           there
           are
           many
           now
           in
           England
           very
           excellent
           at
           it
           .
           If
           any
           ingenious
           spirit
           that
           delights
           in
           Picture
           ,
           and
           hath
           not
           time
           or
           opportunity
           to
           study
           to
           be
           a
           proficient
           in
           Painting
           in
           Oyl
           or
           Limning
           ,
           I
           would
           advise
           him
           to
           practise
           this
           ,
           which
           is
           very
           delightfull
           and
           quickly
           attained
           ;
           the
           manner
           of
           performing
           of
           it
           I
           shall
           here
           in
           this
           Book
           teach
           .
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             I.
             
          
           
             What
             things
             are
             necessary
             to
             be
             alwayes
             ready
             for
             Washing
             of
             Maps
             or
             Pictures
             .
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               I.
               
                 Of
                 Colours
                 for
                 Washing
              
               .
            
             
               HHRE
               note
               ,
               that
               all
               the
               Colours
               that
               are
               mentioned
               in
               the
               Second
               Chapter
               of
               the
               Third
               Book
               concerning
               
                 Limning
                 in
                 Water-Colours
              
               ,
               are
               all
               to
               be
               used
               in
               Washing
               or
               Colouring
               of
               Pictures
               ,
               wherefore
               provide
               your self
               of
               those
               Colours
               ,
               grind
               them
               ,
               wash
               them
               ,
               and
               steep
               and
               temper
               them
               according
               as
               you
               are
               directed
               in
               that
               Second
               Chapter
               ;
               I
               say
               ,
               you
               must
               have
               all
               these
               Colours
               in
               a
               readiness
               ;
               and
               for
               Colouring
               of
               Prints
               some
               other
               Colours
               ,
               namely
               these
               that
               follow
               ,
               which
               how
               to
               order
               I
               will
               anon
               shew
               you
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   Colours
                   to
                   be
                   used
                   in
                   Washing
                   ,
                   which
                   are
                   not
                   used
                   in
                   Limning
                   .
                
                 
                   BLACKS
                   .
                   
                     
                       
                         Printers
                         Black.
                      
                       
                    
                     
                       or
                       ,
                       Franckford
                       -
                       Black
                       ,
                       to
                       be
                       had
                       of
                       the
                       Plate-Printers
                       .
                    
                  
                
                 
                   REDS.
                   
                   
                     
                       Vermilion
                       .
                    
                     
                       Rosset
                       .
                    
                  
                
                 
                   BLEWS
                   .
                   
                     
                       Verditure
                       .
                    
                     
                       Litmos
                       .
                    
                     
                       Flory
                       .
                    
                  
                
                 
                   
                   YELLOWS
                   .
                   
                     
                       Gumbooge
                       ,
                    
                     
                       Yellow-berries
                       ,
                    
                     
                       Orpiment
                       .
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               Also
               these
               ;
            
             
               Brazeel
               and
               Log-wood
               grownd
               ,
               and
               Turnsoil
               .
            
             
               Of
               these
               Colours
               above
               mentioned
               ,
               
                 Printers
                 Black
                 ,
                 Vermilion
                 ,
                 Rosset
                 ,
                 Verditure
                 ,
              
               and
               Orpiment
               are
               to
               be
               Grownd
               as
               is
               taught
               in
               the
               second
               Section
               of
               the
               second
               Chapter
               of
               the
               third
               Book
               ,
               page
               70.
               and
               therefore
               ,
               I
               say
               ,
               Grind
               them
               as
               you
               are
               there
               taught
               .
            
             
               Now
               for
               the
               other
               Colours
               above
               mentioned
               ,
               they
               are
               to
               be
               ordered
               several
               wayes
               ,
               as
               followeth
               .
               And
            
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 Of
                 Litmos
                 ,
                 how
                 to
                 order
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 Take
                 fine
                 Litmos
                 and
                 cut
                 it
                 in
                 small
                 pieces
                 ,
                 then
                 lay
                 it
                 in
                 steep
                 the
                 space
                 of
                 twenty
                 four
                 hours
                 at
                 least
                 ,
                 in
                 a
                 weak
                 Water
                 of
                 Gum-Lake
                 ;
                 [
                 
                   The
                   making
                   of
                   Gum-Lake
                   Water
                   is
                   taught
                   before
                   in
                   the
                   first
                   Chapter
                   of
                   the
                   third
                   Book
                   ,
                   pag.
                
                 66.
                 ]
                 it
                 will
                 be
                 a
                 pure
                 Blew
                 Water
                 ,
                 good
                 to
                 Wash
                 withall
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 2.
                 
                 Of
                 Flory
                 Blew
                 .
              
               
                 Take
                 
                   Flory
                   Blew
                
                 and
                 grind
                 it
                 with
                 the
                 white
                 of
                 an
                 Egg
                 ,
                 [
                 beat
                 the
                 white
                 of
                 the
                 Egg
                 with
                 a
                 spoon
                 in
                 a
                 Porenger
                 till
                 it
                 become
                 a
                 clear
                 Water
                 .
                 ]
              
               
                 Flory
                 thus
                 grownd
                 ,
                 if
                 you
                 add
                 thereto
                 a
                 little
                 Rosset
                 ,
                 it
                 maketh
                 a
                 light
                 Violet-colour
                 .
              
               
                 If
                 you
                 mix
                 with
                 it
                 both
                 Red
                 and
                 White
                 Lead
                 ,
                 it
                 maketh
                 a
                 Crane-Feather-colour
                 .
              
               
               
                 It
                 ,
                 and
                 Pink
                 ,
                 Masticote
                 ,
                 or
                 Gum-booge
                 make
                 a
                 fair
                 Green.
                 
              
            
             
               
                 3.
                 
                 Of
                 Gum-booge
                 .
              
               
                 Take
                 Gum-booge
                 and
                 dissolve
                 it
                 in
                 fair
                 spring-water
                 ,
                 and
                 it
                 maketh
                 a
                 most
                 beautifull
                 and
                 transparent
                 Yellow
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 4.
                 
                 Of
                 Yellow-Berries
                 .
              
               
                 Take
                 Yellow-Berries
                 ,
                 bruise
                 them
                 a
                 little
                 ,
                 and
                 let
                 them
                 steep
                 in
                 Allum-water
                 all
                 night
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 morning
                 you
                 will
                 have
                 a
                 very
                 fair
                 Yellow
                 to
                 Wash
                 withall
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 5.
                 
                 Of
                 Turnsoil
                 .
              
               
                 Turnsoil
                 is
                 made
                 of
                 pieces
                 of
                 Linnen
                 cloth
                 dyed
                 of
                 a
                 kind
                 of
                 Violet-colour
                 .
              
               
                 Take
                 a
                 dish
                 and
                 put
                 some
                 sharp
                 Vinegar
                 therein
                 ,
                 together
                 with
                 your
                 Turnsoil
                 ,
                 then
                 set
                 the
                 dish
                 over
                 a
                 gentle
                 fire
                 in
                 a
                 chafingdish
                 till
                 the
                 Vinegar
                 boyl
                 and
                 be
                 coloured
                 ,
                 then
                 take
                 out
                 the
                 Turnsoil
                 and
                 squeeze
                 it
                 into
                 the
                 Vinegar
                 ;
                 to
                 which
                 put
                 a
                 little
                 Gum
                 -
                 Arabick
                 to
                 dissolve
                 ;
                 it
                 is
                 an
                 excellent
                 good
                 liquor
                 to
                 shadow
                 upon
                 any
                 Carnation
                 or
                 Yellow
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 6.
                 
                 Of
                 Brazeel
                 .
              
               
                 Take
                 Brazeel
                 grownd
                 ,
                 to
                 which
                 put
                 a
                 quantity
                 of
                 small
                 Beer
                 ,
                 and
                 as
                 much
                 Vinegar
                 ,
                 set
                 them
                 in
                 a
                 pan
                 upon
                 a
                 soft
                 fire
                 ,
                 and
                 there
                 let
                 it
                 boyl
                 gently
                 a
                 good
                 while
                 ,
                 then
                 put
                 therein
                 some
                 fine
                 powder
                 of
                 
                 Allum
                 to
                 raise
                 the
                 Colour
                 ,
                 as
                 also
                 some
                 Gum
                 -
                 Arabick
                 to
                 bind
                 it
                 ;
                 boyl
                 it
                 so
                 long
                 till
                 it
                 taste
                 strong
                 on
                 the
                 tongue
                 ,
                 it
                 maketh
                 a
                 very
                 transparent
                 Red.
                 
              
            
             
               
                 7.
                 
                 Of
                 Log-wood
                 .
              
               
                 If
                 you
                 boyl
                 Log-wood
                 grownd
                 in
                 all
                 respects
                 as
                 you
                 did
                 your
                 Brazeel
                 ,
                 it
                 will
                 make
                 a
                 very
                 fair
                 transparent
                 Purple-colour
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               II.
               Of
               other
               necessaries
               .
            
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 Of
                 Allum-water
                 ,
                 how
                 to
                 make
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 TAke
                 a
                 quarter
                 of
                 a
                 pint
                 of
                 Allum
                 ,
                 heat
                 it
                 to
                 powder
                 ,
                 and
                 boyl
                 it
                 in
                 a
                 quart
                 of
                 fair
                 Water
                 till
                 it
                 be
                 dissolved
                 .
              
               
                 With
                 this
                 Water
                 wet
                 over
                 your
                 Pictures
                 that
                 you
                 intend
                 to
                 colour
                 ,
                 for
                 it
                 will
                 keep
                 the
                 Colour
                 from
                 sinking
                 into
                 the
                 Paper
                 ,
                 and
                 it
                 will
                 add
                 a
                 lustre
                 unto
                 the
                 Colours
                 ,
                 and
                 make
                 them
                 shew
                 fairer
                 ;
                 and
                 it
                 will
                 make
                 them
                 continue
                 longer
                 without
                 fading
                 :
                 you
                 must
                 let
                 the
                 Paper
                 dry
                 of
                 it self
                 after
                 you
                 have
                 wetted
                 it
                 ,
                 before
                 you
                 lay
                 on
                 there
                 Colours
                 ,
                 of
                 before
                 you
                 wet
                 it
                 again
                 ;
                 for
                 some
                 Paper
                 will
                 need
                 wetting
                 four
                 or
                 five
                 times
                 .
              
               
                 But
                 if
                 you
                 intend
                 to
                 Varnish
                 your
                 Pictures
                 after
                 you
                 have
                 Coloured
                 them
                 ,
                 you
                 must
                 first
                 Size
                 them
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 rub
                 them
                 over
                 with
                 white
                 Starch
                 new
                 made
                 with
                 a
                 Brush
                 very
                 fine
                 ,
                 in
                 stead
                 of
                 doing
                 them
                 with
                 
                 Allum-water
                 ,
                 he
                 sure
                 you
                 size
                 it
                 all
                 over
                 ,
                 or
                 else
                 the
                 Varnish
                 will
                 sink
                 through
                 ;
                 if
                 your
                 Varnish
                 be
                 too
                 think
                 ,
                 put
                 into
                 it
                 so
                 much
                 Turpentine-oyl
                 as
                 will
                 make
                 it
                 thinner
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 2.
                 
                 How
                 to
                 make
                 Size
                 .
              
               
                 Take
                 some
                 Glew
                 ,
                 and
                 let
                 it
                 steep
                 all
                 night
                 in
                 water
                 to
                 make
                 it
                 the
                 readier
                 to
                 melt
                 in
                 the
                 morning
                 ,
                 then
                 set
                 it
                 on
                 a
                 coal
                 of
                 fire
                 to
                 melt
                 ,
                 to
                 try
                 whether
                 it
                 be
                 neither
                 too
                 stiff
                 nor
                 too
                 weak
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 meanest
                 is
                 best
                 ;
                 take
                 a
                 spoonfull
                 thereof
                 and
                 set
                 it
                 in
                 the
                 air
                 to
                 cool
                 ,
                 or
                 fill
                 a
                 Mussel-shell
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 let
                 it
                 swim
                 in
                 cold
                 water
                 to
                 cool
                 the
                 sooner
                 ;
                 if
                 it
                 be
                 too
                 stiff
                 ,
                 when
                 it
                 is
                 cold
                 put
                 more
                 water
                 to
                 it
                 ,
                 if
                 too
                 weak
                 ,
                 then
                 put
                 more
                 Glew
                 to
                 it
                 ;
                 and
                 when
                 you
                 use
                 it
                 make
                 it
                 luke-warm
                 .
              
               
                 This
                 is
                 to
                 wet
                 your
                 Cloths
                 in
                 ,
                 if
                 you
                 intend
                 to
                 paste
                 your
                 Maps
                 or
                 Pictures
                 upon
                 Cloth
                 ,
                 you
                 may
                 use
                 white
                 Starch
                 to
                 wet
                 your
                 sheet
                 ,
                 and
                 wring
                 it
                 out
                 and
                 strain
                 it
                 upon
                 a
                 frame
                 ,
                 or
                 nail
                 it
                 upon
                 a
                 wall
                 or
                 board
                 ,
                 so
                 paste
                 your
                 Maps
                 or
                 Pictures
                 theron
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 3.
                 
                 How
                 to
                 temper
                 Gold
                 to
                 Write
                 with
                 a
                 Pen
                 or
                 Pencil
                 .
              
               
                 Take
                 the
                 sweepings
                 of
                 leaf-Gold
                 ,
                 such
                 as
                 Book-binders
                 sweep
                 off
                 their
                 Books
                 ,
                 or
                 leafe-Gold
                 it self
                 ,
                 and
                 with
                 stiff
                 Gum-water
                 ,
                 with
                 a
                 pretty
                 deal
                 of
                 white
                 Salt
                 ,
                 grind
                 them
                 very
                 well
                 together
                 ,
                 and
                 put
                 it
                 into
                 a
                 glass
                 ,
                 and
                 put
                 a
                 quantity
                 of
                 fair
                 water
                 as
                 will
                 sufficiently
                 cover
                 it
                 ,
                 to
                 make
                 the
                 stiff-water
                 
                 dissolve
                 ,
                 that
                 so
                 the
                 Gold
                 may
                 settle
                 to
                 the
                 bottom
                 ,
                 and
                 let
                 it
                 stand
                 four
                 or
                 five
                 dayes
                 ,
                 then
                 pour
                 away
                 the
                 water
                 and
                 put
                 clean
                 water
                 to
                 it
                 again
                 ,
                 if
                 you
                 find
                 the
                 Gold
                 dirty
                 ,
                 refresh
                 it
                 again
                 the
                 third
                 time
                 ,
                 then
                 pour
                 it
                 away
                 and
                 take
                 clean
                 water
                 again
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 little
                 Salt-Armoniack
                 and
                 great
                 Salt
                 ,
                 and
                 put
                 it
                 in
                 a
                 gally-pot
                 ,
                 and
                 stop
                 it
                 very
                 close
                 ,
                 and
                 let
                 it
                 stand
                 a
                 week
                 ,
                 then
                 take
                 it
                 out
                 and
                 put
                 it
                 into
                 a
                 a
                 piece
                 of
                 sheeps-skin
                 when
                 the
                 grain
                 is
                 taken
                 off
                 ,
                 tie
                 it
                 up
                 close
                 ,
                 and
                 hang
                 it
                 up
                 that
                 the
                 Salt
                 may
                 fret
                 from
                 it
                 ;
                 then
                 take
                 the
                 Gold
                 and
                 temper
                 it
                 with
                 the
                 white
                 of
                 an
                 Egg
                 or
                 Gum-water
                 :
                 so
                 use
                 it
                 with
                 Pen
                 or
                 Pencil
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 4.
                 
                 Of
                 Pencils
                 .
              
               
                 Provide
                 Pencils
                 of
                 all
                 sorts
                 ,
                 both
                 pointed
                 and
                 fitch
                 ;
                 a
                 large
                 Brush
                 to
                 paste
                 your
                 Maps
                 upon
                 Cloth
                 withall
                 ;
                 another
                 to
                 Wet
                 your
                 Paper
                 with
                 Allum-water
                 ;
                 a
                 third
                 to
                 Starch
                 the
                 face
                 of
                 your
                 Picture
                 withall
                 before
                 you
                 colour
                 it
                 ;
                 and
                 a
                 fourth
                 Brush
                 to
                 Varnish
                 withal
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             II.
             
          
           
             Of
             other
             Colours
             for
             Washing
             ,
             both
             Simple
             and
             Compounded
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               How
               to
               make
               a
               Green
               colour
               of
               Copper-plates
               .
            
             
               TAke
               any
               shreds
               of
               Copper
               and
               put
               distilled
               Vinegar
               to
               them
               ,
               set
               them
               in
               a
               warm
               place
               until
               the
               Vinegar
               become
               Blew
               ,
               then
               pour
               out
               that
               Vinegar
               into
               another
               pot
               well
               leaded
               and
               pour
               more
               Vinegar
               upon
               the
               Copper
               ,
               letting
               that
               stand
               until
               it
               be
               of
               a
               Blew
               colour
               ,
               then
               pour
               it
               into
               the
               former
               liquor
               ;
               this
               you
               may
               do
               so
               often
               until
               you
               have
               liquor
               enough
               ,
               then
               let
               the
               liquor
               stand
               in
               the
               sun
               or
               upon
               a
               slow
               fire
               till
               it
               be
               thick
               enough
               ,
               and
               it
               will
               be
               a
               good
               Green.
               
            
          
           
             
               2.
               
               To
               Make
               a
               Green
               another
               way
               .
            
             
               The
               best
               is
               Cedar-green
               ,
               but
               that
               is
               dear
               ,
               therefore
               you
               may
               take
               green
               Bise
               and
               steep
               it
               in
               Vinegar
               ,
               then
               strain
               it
               through
               a
               linnen
               rag
               ,
               then
               grind
               it
               well
               with
               fair
               water
               ,
               and
               put
               to
               it
               a
               little
               Honey
               ,
               and
               let
               it
               be
               well
               dryed
               ,
               and
               when
               you
               use
               it
               mix
               it
               with
               a
               little
               Gum-water
               .
            
          
           
             
               3.
               
               Another
               Green.
               
            
             
               Take
               the
               juyce
               of
               Rew
               ,
               and
               a
               little
               Verdigrease
               .
               
               and
               a
               little
               Saffron
               ,
               and
               grind
               them
               well
               together
               ,
               and
               use
               it
               with
               a
               little
               Gum-water
               .
            
          
           
             
               4.
               
               For
               light
               Greens
               .
            
             
               
                 Sap-greens
                 ,
                 Flower
                 de
                 Bise
                 ,
                 or
                 Tawny-green
                 ,
              
               these
               need
               no
               grinding
               ,
               only
               steep'd
               in
               fair
               water
               ,
               Verditer
               and
               Ceruss
               mixt
               with
               a
               little
               Copper-green
               ,
               makes
               a
               good
               light
               colour
               .
            
          
           
             
               5.
               
               To
               shadow
               Greens
               .
            
             
               Indico
               and
               Yellow-berries
               will
               do
               very
               well
               .
            
          
           
             
               6.
               
               Greens
               for
               Landskips
               and
               Rocks
               .
            
             
               Temper
               your
               Green
               with
               white
               Pink
               ,
               Bise
               ,
               Masticote
               ,
               Smalt
               ,
               or
               Indico
               ,
               or
               Ceruss
               .
            
             
               Blew
               Verditer
               mixt
               with
               a
               few
               Yellow-berries
               ,
               make
               another
               Green.
               
            
          
           
             
               7.
               
               To
               make
               a
               Blew
               .
            
             
               There
               is
               Venice-Ultamarine
               ,
               but
               this
               is
               very
               dear
               ;
               there
               are
               Bises
               of
               several
               sorts
               ,
               deeper
               or
               paler
               ;
               there
               is
               Smalt
               and
               Verditer
               ;
               grind
               any
               of
               these
               with
               Gum-water
               .
            
          
           
             
               8.
               
               Of
               shadowing
               Blews
               .
            
             
               There
               is
               Indico
               ,
               Litmos
               ,
               or
               Flory
               ,
               take
               any
               of
               these
               ,
               they
               need
               no
               grinding
               ,
               steep
               them
               in
               the
               
               lees
               of
               Sope-ashes
               ,
               when
               you
               use
               them
               put
               Gum-water
               to
               them
               with
               discretion
               .
            
          
           
             
               9.
               
               To
               make
               a
               Brown.
               
            
             
               Take
               Ceruss
               ,
               Red-Lead
               ,
               English-Oker
               ,
               and
               Pink.
               
            
          
           
             
               10.
               
               Spanish
               Brown.
               
            
             
               It
               s
               a
               dirty
               colour
               ,
               yet
               of
               great
               use
               if
               you
               burn
               it
               till
               it
               be
               red
               hot
               ;
               but
               if
               you
               would
               colour
               any
               hare
               ,
               horse
               ,
               or
               dog
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               ,
               you
               must
               not
               burn
               it
               ,
               but
               to
               shadow
               Vermilion
               ,
               or
               to
               lay
               upon
               any
               dark
               ground
               behind
               a
               Picture
               ,
               or
               to
               shadow
               Berries
               in
               the
               darkest
               places
               ,
               or
               to
               colour
               any
               wooden
               Poste
               ,
               Wainscot
               ,
               bodies
               of
               Trees
               ,
               or
               any
               thing
               else
               of
               Wood
               ,
               or
               any
               dark
               ground
               on
               a
               Picture
               .
            
          
           
             
               11.
               
               How
               to
               make
               an
               Orange-colour
               .
            
             
               Red-Lead
               is
               the
               nearest
               to
               an
               Orange
               ,
               put
               a
               few
               Yellow-berries
               into
               it
               ,
               makes
               a
               good
               Orange
               .
            
          
           
             
               12.
               
               A
               Flesh-colour
               .
            
             
               Take
               of
               White
               and
               a
               little
               Lake
               ,
               and
               some
               Red-Lead
               mixed
               ,
               you
               may
               make
               it
               light
               or
               red
               as
               you
               please
               ,
               by
               adding
               more
               or
               less
               White
               in
               shadowing
               the
               Cheeks
               and
               other
               places
               ,
               if
               you
               would
               have
               a
               swarthy
               complexion
               ;
               and
               to
               distinguish
               the
               Mans
               flesh
               from
               the
               Womans
               ,
               mingle
               a
               little
               yellow
               Oker
               among
               your
               Flesh
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               13.
               
               Colours
               for
               the
               Skie
               .
            
             
               Light
               Masticote
               ,
               or
               Yellow-berries
               ,
               and
               White
               for
               the
               lowest
               and
               lightest
               places
               ;
               red
               Posset
               ,
               White
               for
               the
               next
               degree
               ;
               blew
               Bise
               and
               White
               for
               the
               other
               ;
               and
               blew
               Bise
               for
               the
               highest
               ,
               for
               want
               of
               Bise
               use
               Verditer
               ;
               these
               must
               be
               worked
               together
               ;
               you
               must
               not
               receive
               any
               sharpness
               in
               the
               edge
               of
               your
               Colour
               ,
               and
               they
               must
               be
               so
               laid
               on
               ,
               that
               you
               cannot
               perceive
               where
               you
               first
               began
               to
               lay
               them
               ,
               you
               must
               so
               drown
               them
               one
               in
               another
               .
            
          
           
             
               14.
               
               To
               make
               colours
               for
               Precious
               stones
               .
            
             
               Verdigrease
               with
               Varnish
               makes
               an
               Emerald
               ,
               and
               with
               Florence
               Lake
               it
               makes
               a
               Ruby
               ,
               and
               with
               Ultramarine
               it
               makes
               a
               Saphire
               .
            
          
           
             
               15.
               
               Colours
               for
               Landskips
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               faddest
               Hills
               use
               burnt
               Umber
               ,
               for
               the
               lightest
               places
               put
               some
               Yellow
               to
               the
               burnt
               Umber
               ;
               and
               for
               the
               other
               Hills
               lay
               Copper-green
               thickned
               on
               the
               fire
               ,
               or
               in
               the
               Sun
               ;
               for
               the
               next
               Hills
               further
               off
               ,
               mix
               some
               Yellow-berries
               with
               Copper-green
               ,
               and
               let
               the
               fourth
               part
               be
               done
               with
               green
               Verditer
               ;
               and
               the
               furthest
               ,
               faintest
               places
               with
               blew
               Bise
               ,
               and
               for
               want
               of
               that
               ,
               with
               blew
               Verditer
               mingled
               with
               White
               for
               the
               lightest
               places
               ,
               and
               shadowed
               with
               blew
               Verditer
               in
               the
               shadows
               indifferent
               thick
               ;
               the
               Highways
               do
               with
               Red-Lead
               
               and
               White
               ,
               and
               for
               variety
               use
               yellow
               Oker
               ,
               and
               shadow
               it
               with
               burnt
               Umber
               ,
               and
               you
               may
               use
               it
               for
               sandy
               Rocks
               and
               Hills
               ;
               the
               Rocks
               you
               may
               do
               with
               several
               colours
               ,
               in
               some
               places
               Black
               and
               White
               ,
               in
               other
               places
               with
               Red-Lead
               and
               White
               ,
               and
               some
               with
               Blew
               and
               White
               ,
               and
               other
               colours
               ,
               such
               as
               you
               judge
               are
               convenient
               ,
               and
               do
               most
               resemble
               Rocks
               ,
               and
               let
               them
               be
               pleasant
               colours
               ;
               the
               Water
               must
               be
               black
               Verditer
               and
               White
               ,
               shadowed
               with
               green
               and
               with
               blew
               Verditer
               ;
               when
               the
               Banks
               cast
               a
               green
               shadow
               upon
               the
               Water
               ,
               and
               when
               the
               Water
               is
               dark
               in
               the
               shadows
               ,
               then
               shadow
               it
               with
               a
               little
               Indico
               and
               Green
               thickned
               ,
               and
               some
               blew
               Verditer
               .
            
          
           
             
               16.
               
               Colours
               for
               Buildings
               .
            
             
               When
               you
               colour
               Buildings
               ,
               do
               it
               with
               as
               much
               variety
               of
               pleasant
               colours
               as
               possible
               can
               be
               imagined
               ,
               yet
               not
               without
               reason
               ,
               and
               let
               discretion
               rule
               you
               in
               mixing
               your
               Colours
               ;
               in
               colouring
               of
               Buildings
               you
               may
               use
               sometimes
               White
               and
               Black
               for
               the
               Wall
               ,
               Conduits
               ,
               or
               other
               things
               ;
               for
               Brick-houses
               and
               others
               you
               may
               use
               Red-Lead
               and
               White
               ;
               when
               many
               Houses
               stand
               together
               ,
               colour
               them
               with
               various
               colours
               as
               you
               can
               ;
               about
               Buildings
               use
               sometimes
               Umber
               and
               White
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               Lake
               and
               White
               ,
               or
               Red-Lead
               and
               White
               for
               variety
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               17.
               
               How
               to
               Shadow
               every
               colour
               in
               Garments
               ,
               or
               Drapery
               .
            
             
               Take
               this
               Rule
               ,
               that
               every
               Colour
               is
               made
               to
               shadow
               it self
               ,
               or
               if
               you
               mingle
               it
               with
               White
               for
               the
               light
               ,
               and
               so
               shadow
               it
               with
               the
               same
               colour
               unmingled
               with
               White
               ,
               else
               take
               off
               the
               thinnest
               of
               the
               colour
               for
               the
               light
               ,
               and
               so
               shadow
               it
               with
               the
               thickest
               bottom
               of
               the
               colour
               ;
               if
               you
               will
               have
               your
               shadow
               of
               a
               darker
               colour
               ,
               then
               the
               colour
               it self
               is
               to
               shadow
               the
               deepest
               places
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             III.
             
          
           
             General
             Rules
             to
             be
             observed
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             SAp-green
             is
             only
             used
             to
             shadow
             other
             Greens
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             be
             laid
             for
             a
             ground
             in
             any
             Garment
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             Lake
             must
             not
             be
             shadowed
             with
             any
             colour
             ,
             for
             it
             is
             a
             dark
             Red
             ;
             but
             for
             variety
             you
             may
             shadow
             it
             sometimes
             with
             Bise
             ,
             or
             blew
             Verditer
             ,
             which
             will
             make
             it
             shew
             like
             changeable
             Taffata
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Blew
             Verditer
             is
             shadowed
             with
             thin
             Indico
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             Blew
             Bise
             is
             shadowed
             with
             Indico
             in
             the
             darkest
             colours
             ;
             Yellow-berries
             ,
             the
             natural
             shadow
             for
             it
             is
             Umber
             ,
             but
             for
             beauties
             sake
             it
             is
             seldome
             shadowed
             with
             Umber
             ,
             but
             with
             Red-Lead
             ,
             the
             darkest
             touches
             with
             Spanish-Brown
             ;
             and
             for
             
             varieties
             sake
             its
             shadowed
             with
             Copper-green
             thick
             ,
             and
             with
             blew
             Bise
             or
             blew
             Verditer
             .
          
           
             
               What
               Colours
               sets
               off
               best
               together
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               Whites
               are
               very
               usefull
               in
               all
               colours
               ,
               and
               sets
               off
               Black
               and
               Blew
               very
               well
               ;
               but
               Blacks
               are
               not
               much
               used
               ,
               but
               upon
               necessary
               occasions
               in
               some
               things
               ,
               as
               your
               judgement
               shall
               direct
               you
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Reds
               sets
               off
               well
               with
               Yellows
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Yellows
               sets
               off
               well
               with
               Reds
               ,
               sad
               Blews
               ,
               Greens
               ,
               Browns
               ,
               Purples
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Blews
               sets
               off
               well
               with
               Reds
               ,
               Yellows
               ,
               Whites
               ,
               Browns
               ,
               and
               Blacks
               ;
               but
               Blews
               set
               not
               off
               well
               with
               Greens
               and
               Purples
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               But
               Greens
               sets
               off
               well
               with
               Purples
               and
               Reds
               .
            
          
           
             
               SECT
               .
               II.
               
                 Directions
                 for
                 the
                 Mixing
                 of
                 your
                 Colours
                 .
              
            
             
               TO
               mix
               any
               Colour
               ,
               be
               carefull
               that
               you
               make
               it
               not
               too
               sad
               ;
               when
               you
               mix
               your
               Colours
               be
               carefull
               you
               put
               not
               your
               Pencils
               out
               of
               one
               Colour
               into
               another
               ,
               for
               it
               will
               spoil
               and
               dirty
               your
               other
               Colours
               ,
               except
               you
               wash
               your
               Pencils
               clean
               .
            
             
               When
               you
               mix
               any
               Colours
               stir
               them
               well
               about
               the
               water
               ,
               being
               well
               coloured
               pour
               it
               out
               into
               a
               Shell
               ,
               and
               stir
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               Colours
               and
               mingle
               them
               together
               ;
               pour
               out
               the
               Colour
               first
               ,
               that
               you
               may
               the
               better
               know
               what
               quantity
               of
               the
               sadder
               will
               serve
               .
            
             
               FINIS
               .